JP6762510B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold digestion image.
When the decorative symbol is variably displayed, in the first area of the display means, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along the first direction along the variability direction of the decorative symbol, and the hold The first effect that the digestion image is not displayed and
In a second region where the position in the second direction intersecting the first direction is different from the first region, the plurality of holding icons are displayed side by side along the first direction. It is possible to produce and
In the first effect, among the plurality of hold icons, the first displayed hold icon is in the direction along the second direction and moves in the direction toward the second area. A gaming machine characterized in that the remaining hold icons that disappear from the display means and are displayed after the second one shift and move along the first direction .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern variation effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern target effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern target effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern target effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern target effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect A at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect B at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect C at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect D at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the character appearance effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern superimposition effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot background display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of timer effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of timer effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of timer effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating a plurality of timer effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer speed effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer speed effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer speed effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer speed effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer count effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory timer effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory timer effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory timer effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory timer effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon selection effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon selection effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon selection effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the icon selection effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect A during fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect B during fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect C during fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect D during fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the character display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending inner ream suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending inner ream suggestion effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon movement effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon superimposition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon superimposition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon superimposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon superimposition effect D. It is the first figure for demonstrating the hold special display effect. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating the hold special display effect. It is a 3rd figure for demonstrating the hold special display effect. It is a 4th figure for demonstrating the hold special display effect. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means image display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means image display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means image display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means image display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating effect A during probabilistic change. It is a figure for demonstrating effect B during probabilistic change. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect C during probabilistic change. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect D during probabilistic change. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the battle production D.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the game machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. To. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding upward from the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , Gate (through chucker) 28, 1st big winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd big winning device (2nd attacker) 36, general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), general winning It is provided with a mouth 29 (ordinary winning mouth 29), an out mouth 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a region and a reserved digested image display region on which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, the mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or the mode of other modes may be used. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the image is digested (“digestion of special figure hold” described later).

Below the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-shaped member can move up and down. Normally, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) below the display device 7, moves upward (advances) from the retracted position, and is stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 16). be able to. The first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an entrance portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is open than when it is closed, and when the movable member 23 is closed, the second starting port 21 may be entered. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines the predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probabilistic operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges a game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right hit". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize at the second starting port 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the winning are calculated. , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the execution of the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of game states, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. Examples thereof include a sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A and second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (effect patterns are displayed). Image data such as (including) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, or acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decoration body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the respective operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14 according to the operation pattern data. 2 Controls the operation of the movable accessory 15. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to perform command-based lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

The effect button detection switch 63a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when the human body comes into contact with the relay board 108. It may be connected.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5 (B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-determination command, a hold ball number command, The fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V passage command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, The V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600. Drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be judged as "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6-127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table referenced to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). It is a table referenced to do. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV planned passing jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5. When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", it is released. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 will be open even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (prescribed number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. At that time, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the game machine 1, there are "big hits" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (1st jackpot 30 and 2nd jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) displayed as a stop. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is completed. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a big hit to operate. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In the 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (substantial 15R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. That is, the game state after "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot" is a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30. ) However, the high probability is the latent state (latent probability change state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the lottery rate for the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply a "normal probability state (normal probability state). Non-high probability state, low probability state) ". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be a hit is larger in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning a prize in the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this case), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". The low-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting the right side. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the second start port 21 is hit right to win the game ball. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get more start-up prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / miss determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss advance determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. Numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 holding balls described later, and the first special drawing is based on the number of special figure 1 holding balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and uses the acquired random number value as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The number of special figure 2 hold balls is the number of second special figure hold, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure hold. Special Figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. If no game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "miss". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the random value and the fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is preliminarily determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence / absence pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has an ordinary symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is judged as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is judged as "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if there is a "loss" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). The determination of whether or not the time saving state is performed is performed by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P1". "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to (the part of" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”” in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. From the read fluctuation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P15" to The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in Special FIG. From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44”). ”To“ P46 ”)). From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time saving counter in the low accuracy high base state, and "160" is set in the time saving counter in the high accuracy high base state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set current game state (whether or not it is in the probability change state, the probability change counter value, whether or not it is in the time reduction state, the time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or the big winning opening that was temporarily closed after opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the grand prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or it has reached the time to close the big winning opening That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the closing of the large winning opening. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot" for the player, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to finish this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first winning ball has been won in the first winning opening 30 in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39 and is not. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened in the case of "long opening" when the second ball is won. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), in general, the second ball is won. The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "10000" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "10000". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "160" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot is almost a jackpot before the 10,000 jackpot lottery is performed in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second start port) in the time saving state and the jackpot scheduled to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 21H) is during the jackpot game. If V is passed, it is almost guaranteed that the game state after the big hit will be a high accuracy and high base state until the next big hit.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute a specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the pre-reading effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the change effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The “variation effect start process” is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is output to the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state or not, whether it is a time saving state, or not, a probability change The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V pass command, the sub RAM 94 holds the V pass information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The preliminary determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command as a “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. There are multiple types of core production patterns that produce a loss without reach. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and sets the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is being produced (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of the variation in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect that fades the preview image.

8. Operation of the Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffer and the like that appear in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). When receiving (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads out a predetermined variation effect image instructed by the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). When receiving (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command before the end of the fluctuation, and when the command before the end of the fluctuation includes the look-ahead effect pattern information, reads a predetermined look-ahead effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. Further, even if the command before the end of the fluctuation does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When receiving (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and reads the predetermined opening effect image specified in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is terminated.

9. Operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) Using FIGS. 46 to 47, the operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on.

The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-shaped member can move up and down, and can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the first movable accessory 14 is visible to the player. By moving (advancing) upward from the state shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 46, and can be stationary there (the first movable accessory 14). 2 modes). In this second aspect, a part of the image display device 7 is covered. Further, the first movable accessory 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (evacuating) downward from the state shown in FIG. 46, and can be stationary there. The first movable accessory 14 is configured so that the area covering the display screen 7a increases when the first mode is changed to the second mode.

The second movable accessory 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at a retracted position (home position) in which the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first aspect). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. In the second movable accessory 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state shown in FIG. 1, and the second movable accessory 15 can perform a rotation effect as shown in FIG. 47 in front of the display screen 7a (second aspect).

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of this embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. This decorative symbol variation effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production A]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. In the decorative symbol variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the vertical direction may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 48 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is from the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Is also located above. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped and displayed at the same vertical positions. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

At the start of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L moves upward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves upward. The left decorative symbol 8L, which has been moving upward, has a reduced moving speed in the upward direction as if gravity is acting in the downward direction, and folds back above the display screen 7a to start moving downward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R moves upward. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has been moving upward, has a reduced moving speed in the upward direction as if gravity is acting in the downward direction, and folds back above the display screen 7a to start moving downward. The moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L, which has been moving downward, increases. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R, which has been moving upward, has a reduced moving speed in the upward direction as if gravity is acting downward, and the display screen 7a is displayed. It folds up and starts moving downward. The moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that has been moving downward increases in the downward direction.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 (F) and 48 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in order increase the downward moving speed, and in that order. The numbers are not visible. FIG. 48 (G) shows an embodiment in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving directions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the time of change are the same as the directions in which the hold icons 9A are lined up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (H), the variable display left decorative symbol 8L disappears from the display screen 7a, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (I), the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (J), the variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of all the decorative symbols becomes difficult to see.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production B]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. First, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. The mode in which the display is stopped is the same as in FIG. 48 (A) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. Next, the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 49 (B) is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as FIG. 48 (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (A) to (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the stop display of FIG. 49 (A) and the variation display of FIG. 49 (B). Next, the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 49 (C) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as in FIG. 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (G) to 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the variation display of FIG. 49 (B) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 49 (C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R that are variablely displayed are displayed. The moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R decreases downward, and as shown in FIG. 49 (E), the numbers gradually become visible. Next, as shown in 49 (F), the left-right symbol reverse direction movement effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R starts moving upward (reverse direction) while the left decorative symbol 8L continues to move downward. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may have different positions in the vertical direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), the variablely displayed middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed between the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed. The moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in the downward direction decreases, and as shown in FIG. 49 (I), the numbers gradually become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (J), all the symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production C]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed. This decorative symbol variation effect is the same as FIG. 48 (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (A) to (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed before the variation display of FIG. 50 (A). Next, the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 50 (B) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as in FIG. 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (G) to 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be executed between the variation display of FIG. 50 (A) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 50 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the left decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L gradually becomes visible as it moves from the upper side to the lower side on a curved orbit curved to the left while the moving speed decreases. More specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L appears from the upper left of the display screen 7a, heads toward the center while drawing an arc, and heads toward the lower left of the display screen 7a while drawing an arc. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along an orbit curved so as to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the left decorative symbol 8L gradually becomes larger as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the right decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R gradually becomes visible as it moves from the upper side to the lower side on a curved orbit curved to the right while the moving speed decreases. More specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a, heads toward the center while drawing an arc, and heads toward the lower right of the display screen 7a while drawing an arc. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along an orbit curved so as to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the right decorative symbol 8R gradually becomes larger as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the intermediate decoration symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed at the reach, the middle decorative symbol 8C moves from above to below on a straight orbit while the moving speed decreases. Will gradually become visible. At this time, the image of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C gradually becomes larger as it moves. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes difficult to see again. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed by horizontally rotating the three-dimensional numbers. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (H), a special reach effect is executed. As the content of the special reach production, any production can be performed. Here, as an example, a battle production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight is performed. When defeated in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed with the three-dimensional numbers rotated horizontally, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the left decorative symbol 8L. And a number different from the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation production D]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. The decorative symbol variation effect D is different from the decorative symbol variation effect A in FIG. 48 in the direction in which the decorative symbols are arranged and the direction of variation. In the decorative symbol variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are stopped and displayed. When the upper decorative symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the left-right direction may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 51 (A), the upper decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C have the same position in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative symbol 8L has the upper decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. It is located on the left side of. The upper decorative symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed in the same left-right position. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in the left-right direction below the display screen 7a.

At the start of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the upper decorative symbol 8R moves to the right. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves to the right. The upper decorative symbol 8R, which has been moving to the right, has a reduced moving speed to the right as if it were attracted to the left, and turns back on the right side of the display screen 7a to start moving to the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the lower decorative symbol 8L moves to the right. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has been moving to the right, has a reduced moving speed to the right as if it were attracted to the left, and turns back on the right side of the display screen 7a to start moving to the left. The moving speed of the upper decorative symbol 8R, which has been moving to the left, increases to the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the lower decorative symbol 8L, which has been moving to the right, slows down to the right as if it were attracted to the left, and is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Turn back and start moving to the left. The moving speed of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which has been moving to the left, increases to the left.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 51 (F) and 51 (G), the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L sequentially increase the moving speed to the left, and in that order. The numbers are not visible. FIG. 51 (G) shows an embodiment in which the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variablely displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving directions of the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L at the time of change are the same as the directions in which the hold icons 9A are lined up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (H), the variablely displayed upper decorative symbol 8R disappears from the display screen 7a, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variablely displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (I), the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (J), the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of all the decorative symbols becomes difficult to see.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 48). (A)), the second effect (FIG. 48 (G)) in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed after the first effect, and the second effect. After the effect of, the left decorative symbol 8L that is variablely displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely displayed in the third effect (FIG. 48 (H)). After the third effect, the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed in the fourth effect (FIG. 48 (I)). it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (B) to 48 (F), the variable display in the second effect includes the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Each moves in the vertical direction, and at the start of the variable display, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move upward in order, and then move downward in order. To do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), in the stop display in the first effect, one of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The position of the decorative symbol in the vertical direction is different from the position of the other two decorative symbols. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect, a plurality of hold icons are arranged along the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I) and 48 (J), after the fourth effect, the variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R disappears from the display screen 7a, and the fifth effect. As shown in FIGS. 49 (C) and 49 (D), after the fifth effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and the sixth effect is shown in FIG. 49 (F). As described above, after the sixth effect, the seventh effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves upward while the left decorative symbol 8L is moving downward becomes feasible. ing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), after the seventh effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is again displayed. It is possible to execute the eighth effect in which is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I), (J), and 50 (B), after the fourth effect, the variable display right decorative symbol 8R disappears from the display screen 7a. The fifth effect, and as shown in FIG. 50 (C), after the fifth effect, the sixth effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L moving along the curved trajectory in an arc is displayed, and the sixth effect. As shown in FIG. 50 (D), after the sixth effect, the seventh effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R moving along the curved trajectory in an arc is displayed, and in FIG. 50 (E). As shown, after the seventh effect, the eighth effect in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moving along the vertical direction is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 8]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, in the sixth effect, the image of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes larger with movement, and in the seventh effect, the right decorative symbol 8R becomes larger with movement. In the seventh effect, the image of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes larger as it moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern variation effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 48 (B) to 48 (D), the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start moving upward can be arbitrarily set. The interval at which each starts moving may be, for example, a 1-second interval or a 0.01-second interval. The same applies to FIGS. 51 (B) to 51 (D).

[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 48 (H) to 48 (J), the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are variablely displayed, disappear from the display screen 7a can be arbitrarily set. The interval at which each disappears may be, for example, a 1-second interval or a 0.01-second interval. The same applies to FIGS. 51 (H) to 51 (J).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern.
A first effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed on the display means.
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed.
After the second effect, the first decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed disappears from the display means, and the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are variablely displayed.
After the third effect, the second decorative symbol that is variably displayed disappears from the display means, and the third effect that the third decorative symbol is variably displayed can be executed. A game machine to be.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
In the variation display in the second effect, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol move along the first direction, respectively. At the start of the variable display, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are sequentially moved toward one side in the first direction, and then the first decorative symbol is sequentially displayed. A gaming machine characterized by moving toward the other side of the direction.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2.
In the stop display in the first effect, the decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is positioned in the first direction. Is a gaming machine characterized in that is different from the positions of the other two decorative symbols.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
A game machine according to the aspect A1-2 or the aspect A1-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the second effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that a plurality of the hold icons are arranged along the first direction.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-2 to A1-4.
After the fourth effect, the fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol that is variablely displayed disappears from the display means,
After the fifth effect, the sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and
After the sixth effect, the third decorative symbol moves toward the other side in the first direction, and the third decorative symbol moves toward the other side in the first direction. A game machine characterized by being able to perform a seventh effect that moves toward.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-5.
After the seventh effect, the eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol is variably displayed can be executed again in a state where the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. A game machine that features something like that.
◇ [Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-2 to A1-4.
After the fourth effect, the fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol that is variablely displayed disappears from the display means,
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol moving along an arc-curved orbit is displayed, and
After the sixth effect, the seventh effect in which the third decorative pattern moving along an arc-curved orbit is displayed, and
A gaming machine characterized in that after the seventh effect, an eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol moving along the first direction is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect A1-8]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-7.
In the sixth effect, the image of the first decorative pattern becomes larger as it moves.
In the seventh effect, the image of the third decorative pattern becomes larger as it moves.
In the seventh effect, the second decorative symbol is a gaming machine characterized in that the image becomes larger as it moves.

The decorative symbol target effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. This decorative symbol target effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol target effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern target production A]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative symbol target effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52B, the target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8L. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbol 8L and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target when the decorative symbol is stopped as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA. Further, the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. The other decorative symbols 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner as in the case of the variable start effect. Further, in the following, in the decorative symbol target effect A, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the "6" symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the "7" symbol. In the target area A21, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the ally character CRA and the chance-up image A22 including the characters representing "super hot" are displayed, and the ally character CRA is screaming "super hot". The "super hot" represented by the chance-up image A22 suggests that the jackpot expectation is very high.
In addition, instead of this chance-up effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, an accessory movable effect, or the like may be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 52C, there is a case where the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L (for example, the blank symbol is stopped and displayed). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 52 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative pattern target production B]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative symbol target effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53B, the target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8L, the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8C, and the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8R. Set. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target when the decorative symbols are stopped, as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R is set on the LBB. Further, each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variablely displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to each. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect B, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53C, the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with a "6" symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with a "6" symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB. Is stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol. In each target area A21, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), the chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the ally character CRA and the chance-up image A22 including the characters representing "super hot" are displayed, and the ally character CRA is screaming "super hot". The "super hot" represented by the chance-up image A22 suggests that the jackpot expectation is very high.
In addition, instead of this chance-up effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, an accessory movable effect, or the like may be performed.

In FIG. 53C, there is a case where there is a target area A21 in which the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific target area A21) in each target area A21. In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 53 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative pattern target production C]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect C.
In the decorative symbol target effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8L, the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8C, and the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8R. Set. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target when the decorative symbols are stopped, as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R is set on the LBB. Further, each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variablely displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to each. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect C, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the "6" symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the "6" symbol. In each target area A21, the same decorative symbol (here, the “6” symbol) is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the ally character CRA and the timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), it is suggested that an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.
In addition, instead of this timer display effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a character movable effect, and the like may be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 54C, there is a case where the same decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed in each target area A21 (for example, a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 54 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative design target production D]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect D.
In the decorative symbol target effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8L, the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8C, and the target area A21 is set in the fluctuating area of the decorative symbol 8R. Set. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is cracked, and serves as a target when the decorative symbols are stopped, as will be described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R is set on the LBB. Further, each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variablely displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to each. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is variablely displayed in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is variablely displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect D, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

Further, in this target area display effect, the target symbol suggestion image A25 and the button image A24 are displayed. The button image A24 is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63. The target symbol suggestion image A25 suggests a specific decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect. Here, the target symbol suggestion image A25 suggests that the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 in the target effect is the “6” symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect (button press effect) is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C. Is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the "6" symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the "6" symbol. In each target area A21, the decorative symbol (here, the “6” symbol) suggested by the target symbol suggestion image A25 is stopped and displayed, so that the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the ally character CRA and the timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), it is suggested that an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.
In addition, instead of this timer display effect, another effect may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a character movable effect, and the like may be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 55 (C), when the decorative symbol suggested by the target symbol suggestion image A25 is not stopped and displayed in each target area A21 (for example, when the blank symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific target region A21, it is specified. In the target area A21 of the above, there is a case where a decorative symbol other than the decorative symbol suggested by the target symbol suggestion image A25 is stopped and displayed). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 55 (D) is not performed.

The decorative symbol target effects A to D are executed before the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols and the reach effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol target effects A to D may be performed during the reach effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern target effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target area A21 is displayed when the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the decorative symbol target effect, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. , Chance up production and timer display production are performed. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether or not the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed based on whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop display of the decorative pattern, and to improve the interest of the stop display of the decorative pattern. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target production, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the target area A21 is set corresponding to each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to the stop display of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the interest of the decorative symbol at the time of the stop display can be further improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55 in the decorative symbol target effect, a chance is obtained based on the fact that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in each target area A21 in the target area display effect. Up production and timer display production are performed. According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to the stop display of each decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the interest of the decorative symbol at the time of stop display can be further improved. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbol target effect is performed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the start of the reach effect. According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to the stop display of the decorative symbol even before the reach effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the decorative symbol when the stop display is displayed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, a specific decorative symbol (decorative symbol “6” in the above) is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. A predetermined effect (timer display effect) is performed. According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to the stop display of a specific decorative symbol, and the interest of the stop display of the decorative symbol can be further improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern target effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, instead of one decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the target area A21, a plurality of decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in the target area A21.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, other objects, for example, characters and characters may be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 instead of the decorative symbol.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol target effects B to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target areas A21 may be set to the same reach line, or each may be set to a different reach line. For example, the target area A21 may be set in the reach line LAA, the reach line LAB, and the reach line LAC, respectively.

[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the target area A21 is set, a plurality of target areas A21 are set for each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R instead of one target area A21. You may try to do it.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, another display device (also referred to as another display device) may be provided in front of the display device 7. Then, in the decorative symbol target effect, the target area A21 may be set in another display device, and the display device 7 may perform the variation and stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, the target area A21 may be set in the display device 7, and the variation and stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be performed by another display device.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target area A21 is set, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the target area A21 is moved so that the specific decorative symbol is included in the target area A21. You may.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A2-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of changing the decorative pattern.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a target area for stopping the decorative symbol on the display means.
The third display effect is an effect of performing a predetermined effect.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the target area is reached. Based on the stop display of the decorative design, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
The decorative design has a plurality of decorative design groups.
The target region has a plurality of target regions and has a plurality of target regions.
The first display effect is an effect of varying each of the plurality of decorative symbols.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the plurality of target areas on the display means.
In the second display effect, the plurality of target areas are displayed in the same number as the number of the plurality of decorative symbol groups, and one decorative symbol group is associated with one target area.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed based on the fact that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of target areas in the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3.
The combination effect is performed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the start of the reach effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the target area is reached. The third display effect is performed based on the stop display of a specific decorative pattern.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. This reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern (during the reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach, the corresponding image data or drive data from the ROM 103 is included. Is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect A at the time of reach]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect A at the time of reach.
In the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the stop display state on the reach line LX1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. In FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “7” symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56B, the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Further, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 56B, the “7” symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C. In the following, among the two decorative symbols 8C, one decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a first decorative symbol 8C, and the other decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a second decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach each other is executed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), the reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to form one decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbols) are executed on the reach line LX1. ) Is used to display the jackpot symbol array. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C after superimposition has lower transmittance than the two decorative symbols 8C before superimposition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect is executed, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position to emphasize the jackpot.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect B at the time of reach]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect B at the time of reach.
In the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a W reach state (double reach state) is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in a stop display state on the reach lines LX1 and the reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. .. In FIG. 57 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “7” symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the "6" symbol. That is, the W reach state of the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Further, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 57 (B), the “6” symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach each other is executed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to form one decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“6” symbols) are executed on the reach line LX3. ) Is used to display the jackpot symbol array. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C after superimposition has lower transmittance than the two decorative symbols 8C before superimposition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“6” symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect is executed, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position to emphasize the jackpot.

[Decoration pattern superimposition effect C at the time of reach]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect C at the time of reach.
In the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a W reach state (double reach state) is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in a stop display state on the reach lines LX1 and the reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. .. In FIG. 58 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “7” symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the "6" symbol. That is, the W reach state of the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Further, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 58 (B), the “6” symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach each other is executed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, two decorative symbols 8C are combined to form one decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C before the combination was the "6" symbol, but the decorative symbol 8C after the combination was the "8" symbol. The decorative symbol 8C after coalescence has lower transmittance than the two decorative symbols 8C before coalescence. As a result, a lost symbol array using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the reach line LX3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the reach effect 5 is executed. In this reach effect 5, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed again, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Further, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 58 (E), the “7” symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), the reach effect 6 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach each other is executed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the reach effect 7 is executed. In this reach effect 7, two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to form one decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbol) are executed on the reach line LX3. ) Is used to display the jackpot symbol array. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C after superimposition has lower transmittance than the two decorative symbols 8C before superimposition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), the jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect is executed, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position to emphasize the jackpot.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect D during reach]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect D at the time of reach.
In the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, the reach state is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the stop display state on the reach line LX1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. In FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “7” symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Further, the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In FIG. 59 (B), the “7” symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the reach effect 3 is executed. In this reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach each other is executed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, and the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped and the second decorative symbol 8C may move closer to the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. Further, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C, then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to form one decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbols) are executed on the reach line LX1. ) Is used to display the jackpot symbol array. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C after superimposition has lower transmittance than the two decorative symbols 8C before superimposition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the jackpot symbol display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared with the reach effect of 4 o'clock. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C may be displayed so large that it overlaps with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the jackpot symbol display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (“7” symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect 2 is executed, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position to emphasize the jackpot.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern superimposition effect at the time of reach.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach effect 2 and 5, the two decorative symbols 8C are arranged so as not to overlap on the line LX2, and the reach effects 3 and 6 are two. The decorative symbols 8C are brought close to each other, and in the reach effects 4 and 7, the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to generate the decorative symbol 8C having low transparency, and the decorative symbol 8C and the decoration forming the reach state are formed. A jackpot symbol array is formed using the symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, two highly transparent decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to form a jackpot symbol array, so that the player pays attention to the two decorative symbols 8C and superimposes them. (Union) will be expected. As a result, the interest in the reach production can be greatly improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect, the two decorative symbols 8C superimposed in the reach effect and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are the same symbols. According to this configuration, the player can recognize that if the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined), it will be a big hit, and the overlapping effect of the two decorative symbols 8C will be greatly excited, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. Can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach, the decorative symbols 8C generated by superimposing the two decorative symbols 8C in the reach effect and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are combined. Use to construct a jackpot symbol array. According to this configuration, if the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined), the player becomes a big hit, so that the overlapping effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly excited, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed to form a W reach state, and the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed. Then, in the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect B, the superimposed decorative symbol 8C is used to form a jackpot symbol array on the reach line LX3, and in the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect C, the superimposed decorative symbol 8C is used. Therefore, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LX1. According to this configuration, if the two decorative symbols 8C are successfully superimposed in one of the two overlapping effects using the two decorative symbols 8C, it will be a big hit, so that the player is in a single reach state. It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the superimposition effect in the W reach state than the time. As a result, the superimposing effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly excited, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach, after the jackpot symbol display effect is executed, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the unfolded position to emphasize the jackpot. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize to the player that the two decorative symbols 8C in the reach state have become a big hit, and then the player has two decorative symbols in the reach state. When experiencing the superimposed effect of 8C, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to the superimposed effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern superimposition effect at the time of reach.
[Modification 1]
In the reach effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8C generated by superimposing the two decorative symbols 8C and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are used in the reach effect. Instead of forming a jackpot symbol array, a chance eye symbol array representing a chance eye, a look-ahead suggestion symbol array suggesting a look-ahead effect (pre-judgment effect), and a pseudo-continuous effect suggestion symbol array suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect are formed. May be good.

[Modification 2]
In the reach-time decorative symbol superimposition effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of moving the second movable accessory 15 to the unfolding position is performed when the two decorative symbols 8C are successfully superposed. May be good.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach and the character appearance effect described later may be performed with the same variation. For example, in the same variation, the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach may be performed after the character appearance effect is executed, the character appearance effect may be performed after the decorative symbol superimposition effect at the time of reach, or the character appearance effect may be performed at the time of reach. The decorative pattern superimposition effect and the character appearance effect may be performed at the same time.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach decorative symbol superimposition effect, when displaying two highly transparent decorative symbols 8C, a predetermined character or character is displayed on the background of these two decorative symbols 8C. You may. After that, if the two decorative symbols 8C are successfully superposed, the decorative symbols 8C generated by the superimposition may make some or all of these characters and characters invisible.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of forming a first reach state by using the first decorative pattern.
In the second display effect, a second decorative symbol having higher transparency than the first decorative symbol is displayed at the first position, and a third decorative symbol having higher transparency than the first decorative symbol is displayed. Is displayed in a second position different from the first position.
In the third display effect, the second decorative symbol is moved from the first position, the third decorative symbol is moved from the second position, and the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are moved. It is an effect that the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol having lower transparency than the third decorative symbol are generated by superimposing the three decorative symbols.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed and the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect, the third display effect is performed. The display effect of is performed, and the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect are used. The first symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1.
The first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect are the same symbols.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A3-3]
A game machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
As the first symbol arrangement, the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect are used. A jackpot symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
In the first display effect, the first decorative symbol is used to form the first reach state, and the fifth decorative symbol is used to form a second reach state different from the first reach state. It is a production to form
In the combination effect, a second decorative symbol using the fifth decorative symbol forming the second reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect is used. The pattern array of
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4.
In the combination effect, after the first symbol arrangement is formed, the accessory effect of moving a predetermined accessory is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The character appearance effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. This character appearance effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the target area display effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Character appearance effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect A.
In the character appearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in a lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is the “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is the “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is the “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60B, the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60C, the reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 in the stop display state and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. .. In FIG. 60 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the "7" symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. Further, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged on the back surface (behind) of the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates at a low speed. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back surface (behind) of the decorative symbol 8C. Further, the decorative symbol 8C has a transmittance that makes the character image A41 completely invisible to the player. Not limited to this, the decorative symbol 8C may have a transmittance such that the character image A41 can be slightly seen. In FIG. 60 (D), the “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in the character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C becomes visible to the player.

In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped.

When the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect 2, the super reach effect is then performed. As described above, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that it develops into a super reach effect.

[Character appearance effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect B.
In the character appearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in a lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is the “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is the “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is the “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 in the stop display state and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. .. In FIG. 61 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the "7" symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. Further, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is arranged on the back surface (behind) of the decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates at a low speed. In this case, a part of the character image A41 is located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C, and a part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative symbol 8C. Further, the decorative symbol 8C has a transmittance that makes the character image A41 completely invisible to the player. Not limited to this, the decorative symbol 8C may have a transmittance such that the character image A41 can be slightly seen. In FIG. 61 (D), the “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in the character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 (part) located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C is visible to the player, that is, the entire character image A41 is visible to the player.

In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped.

When the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect 2, the super reach effect is then performed. As described above, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that it develops into a super reach effect.

[Character appearance effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect C.
In the character appearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in a lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is the “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is the “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is the “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62B, the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 in the stop display state and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. .. In FIG. 62 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the "7" symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the decorative symbols 8C are stopped and displayed at the "7" symbol, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7" symbols, and the jackpot symbol array is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. From this, it can be seen that the player has made a big hit. Further, in this jackpot confirmation effect, the character image A41 is arranged on the back surface (behind) of the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C. Further, the decorative symbol 8C has a transmittance that makes the character image A41 completely invisible to the player. Not limited to this, the decorative symbol 8C may have a transmittance such that the character image A41 can be slightly seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the character appearance effect is executed. In this character appearance effect, the transparency of the decorative symbol 8C is higher than that in the case of the jackpot confirmation effect. Therefore, in this character appearance effect, the character image A41 located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C becomes visible to the player.

In the jackpot confirmation effect, the character image A41 is configured such that the entire area is located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C, but the character image A41 is partially located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C and is partially decorated. The configuration may be such that it protrudes from the symbol 8C.

When the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that something advantageous to the player occurs. For example, when the character image A41 appears, the appearance of the character image A41 may indicate that there is a big hit in the hold (holding ball ream chan), or 16R (maximum round) in the big hit game. (Number) It may be suggested that it is a definite jackpot, or it may be suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a state advantageous to the player (probability change state).

[Character appearance effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect D.
In the character appearance effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped in a lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is the “6” symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is the “8” symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is the “7” symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 in the stop display state and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. .. In FIG. 63 (A), on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the "7" symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. Further, in the character appearance effect 1, the two character images A43 are arranged on the back surface (behind) of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, respectively. In this case, a part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative symbol, and a part of the character image A41 is located on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have a transmittance that makes the character image A43 completely invisible to the player. Not limited to this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may have a transmittance such that the character image A43 can be seen faintly. In FIG. 63 (D), the “7” symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed, and the transparency of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in the character appearance effect 2, the character image A43 located on the back surface of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be visually recognized by the player.

In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may be stopped. Further, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A43 may have a configuration in which the entire area is arranged on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8L or the decorative symbol 8R.

When the character image A43 appears in the character appearance effect 2, the super reach effect is then performed. As described above, the appearance of the character image A43 suggests that it develops into a super reach effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character appearance effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a relatively highly transparent state in the character appearance effects A to C, the character image A41 is arranged on the back surface of the 8 decorative symbols 8C. After that, when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a state where the transparency is relatively low, the character image A41 is visibly displayed through the decorative symbol 8C. Further, in the character appearance effect D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a state of relatively high transparency, the character image A43 is arranged behind (behind) the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. After that, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a state where the transmittance is relatively low, the character image A43 is visibly displayed through the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative symbol appears by increasing the transparency of the decorative symbol, so that the player can be given a great sense of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, the character image A41 is arranged on the back surface of the 8 decorative symbols 8C when the decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed in a state of relatively high transparency. After that, when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a state where the transparency is relatively low, the character image A41 is visibly displayed through the decorative symbol 8C. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative symbol 8C during the variable display appears due to the increased transparency of the decorative symbol, so that the player is given a great sense of surprise during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Can be done. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effects A and B, after the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the character image is displayed when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in low-speed fluctuation in a relatively high transmittance state. When the A41 is arranged on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C and then the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a relatively low transmittance state, the character image A41 is visibly displayed through the decorative symbol 8C. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative symbol 8C during the low-speed fluctuation display appears by increasing the transparency of the decorative symbol, so that the appearance of the character image can be impressed on the player, and the player can be impressed. Can give a big surprise to the image. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect C, the character image A41 is arranged on the back surface of the decorative symbol 8C which is a decorative symbol 8C having a relatively high transparency and is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the character image A41 is transparently displayed to the player through the decorative symbol 8C which is stopped and displayed, the appearance of the character image can be carefully impressed by the player. As a result, even when the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed and it is boring, the player can be given a great sense of surprise, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the character image may be arranged on the back surface of the decorative pattern in a state where the transparency is relatively low in the character appearance effect 1 or the jackpot confirmation effect. At that time, the character image (all or part of it) becomes invisible to the player due to the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, by creating the invisible state, the appearance of the next character can be emphasized, and the character appearance effect can be made more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the character appearance effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is suggested that the appearance of the character image A41 develops into a super reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be suggested that the appearance of the character image A41 develops into a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a chance-up effect, and the like. In this case, when the character image A41 appears, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, and a chance-up effect are performed.
Further, the appearance of the character image A41 may suggest a big hit.

[Modification 2]
In the character appearance effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the appearance of the character images A41 and A43 was during the character appearance effect 1 and the jackpot confirmation effect, but during the decorative symbol stop effect, the change start effect, and the reach formation effect. You may do it at times. After that, the character appearance effect and the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the character appearance effects A, B, and D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, first, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in low-speed fluctuation with the "6" symbol, and at that time, the character appearance effect 1 is executed, and then the decorative symbol 8C is executed. May be displayed in a low-speed variation with the "7" symbol, and at that time, the character appearance effect 2 may be executed. That is, in the character appearance effects A, B, and D, in the W reach state, the character appearance effect 1 is first performed with the reach of one reach line, and the character appearance effect 2 is performed with the reach of the other reach line. You may.

[Modification example 4]
In the character appearance effects A to C of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character appearance effect, the character image A41 can form a jackpot symbol array together with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R when stopped (for example, the decorative symbol 8C (for example). In FIG. 60, it is arranged so as to be hidden behind the “7” symbol), and it appears when the decorative symbol 8C becomes more transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character appearance effect, the character image A41 is a decorative symbol 8C that cannot form a jackpot symbol array together with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R when stopped (for example, the “8” symbol in the situation of FIG. 60). It may be arranged so as to be hidden behind, and may appear by increasing the transparency of the decorative symbol 8C.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A4-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern with the first transmittance.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative pattern with a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined character.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and when the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed. The predetermined character in the third display effect may be arranged behind the decorative symbol displayed with the second transmittance, and may be visibly displayed through the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of forming a reach state by using the decorative pattern.
The reachable decorative symbol includes a stationary decorative symbol and a variable decorative symbol.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative symbol in the fluctuating state has the second transmittance. The predetermined character may be placed behind the fluctuating decorative symbol and may be visibly displayed through the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-2.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the decorative symbol in the fluctuating state is displayed in a low speed variation from the high speed variation display, and the predetermined character is arranged behind the decorative symbol in the low speed variation display. , May be displayed visibly through the decorative pattern,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-4]
A game machine according to aspect A4-2 or aspect A4-3.
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative symbol in the stopped state has the second transmittance. The predetermined character is arranged behind the decorative symbol in the stopped state, and may be visibly displayed through the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect or the second display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed. When the third display effect is performed, the predetermined character is arranged behind the decorative symbol displayed with the first transmittance, and may be invisible due to the decorative symbol. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

The jackpot symbol arrangement display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. This jackpot symbol array display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the jackpot symbol array display effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is output from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big hit symbol array display production A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect A.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, the reach state is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. In FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the W reach effect is executed. In this W reach effect, the decorative symbols 8C are maintained in the high-speed variable display, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 to be in the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 64 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect to form an "X" shape with the two lines.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 64 (D), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 64 (E), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game production is a display production during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 64 (F), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game production, the jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, represents the jackpot reach line and the information of the jackpot symbol array in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image showing round information, an image suggesting right-handed hitting, an image showing acquired ball output information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (E) are performed during the same fluctuation, and the production of FIGS. 64 (F) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. Not limited to this, the production of FIGS. 64 (E) to 64 (F) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit symbol array display effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect B.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, the reach state is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. In FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the W reach effect is executed. In this W reach effect, the decorative symbols 8C are maintained in the high-speed variable display, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 to be in the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 65 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect to form an "X" shape with the two lines.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 65 (D), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 65 (E), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 3, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 2. In FIG. 65 (F), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game production is a display production during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 65 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game production, the jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, represents the jackpot reach line and the information of the jackpot symbol array in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image showing round information, an image suggesting right-handed hitting, an image showing acquired ball output information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (F) are performed during the same fluctuation, and the production of FIGS. 65 (G) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. Not limited to this, the production of FIGS. 65 (E) to 65 (G) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit symbol array display effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect C.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, the reach state is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. In FIG. 66 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the W reach effect is executed. In this W reach effect, the decorative symbols 8C are maintained in the high-speed variable display, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 to be in the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 66 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect to form an "X" shape with the two lines.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 66 (D), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C overlaps the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 3, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 66 (F), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. In FIG. 66 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game production is a display production during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 66 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game production, the jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, represents the jackpot reach line and the information of the jackpot symbol array in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image showing round information, an image suggesting right-handed hitting, an image showing acquired ball output information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 66 (A) to 66 (G) are performed during the same fluctuation, and the production of FIGS. 66 (G) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. Not limited to this, the production of FIGS. 66 (F) to 66 (H) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit symbol array display effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect D.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, the reach state is formed by setting the decorative symbols 8L and 8R in the stop display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a high-speed variable display state. In FIG. 67 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed by the “6” symbol, and the reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending diagonally upward to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the W reach effect is executed. In this W reach effect, the decorative symbols 8C are maintained in the high-speed variable display, and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped and displayed on the reach line LN2 to be in the W reach state on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 67 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol, and the W reach state is formed by using the “6” symbol and the “7” symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending diagonally upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 intersect to form an "X" shape with the two lines.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 67 (D), a jackpot symbol array of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C overlaps the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the accessory movable effect is executed. In this accessory movable effect, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the advance position and moved to the front of the display screen 7a. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1. That is, the jackpot symbol arrangement on the reach line LN1 is visible to the player from the area not covered by the second movable accessory 15 on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 3, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line on the upper left of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 67 (F), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), the jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In this jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN6 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. In FIG. 67 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the jackpot game effect is executed. This jackpot game production is a display production during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 67 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same “6” symbol as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game production, the jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen at the time of the jackpot display effect 1, that is, represents the jackpot reach line and the information of the jackpot symbol array in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image showing round information, an image suggesting right-handed hitting, an image showing acquired ball output information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

The effects of FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (H) are performed during the same fluctuation, and the production of FIGS. 67 (I) is performed during the jackpot game immediately after any change. Not limited to this, the production of FIGS. 67 (G) to 67 (I) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, a reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, a W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the reach state is formed on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol array is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4 and line LN5. According to this configuration, the effect of the decorative symbol can be enjoyed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1 and on the line LN4 or the line LN5. It is possible to change the viewpoint to the player and display the jackpot symbol array, emphasize the jackpot, and amplify the joy of the player's jackpot. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect, a reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, a W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol array is displayed, then the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4, and the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN5 during the subsequent jackpot game. According to this configuration, the effect of the decorative symbol can be enjoyed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the line LN4, so that the player can enjoy the effect. The jackpot symbol array can be displayed from different viewpoints, and the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN5 during the jackpot game, so the jackpot is emphasized and the joy of being a jackpot of the player is further enhanced. It can be amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 (for example, FIG. 64 (D)), and the line LN4, the line LN5, or It is performed during the same fluctuation as the effect (for example, FIG. 64 (E)) in which the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. According to this configuration, since the player can change the viewpoint and display the jackpot symbol array during the same fluctuation, the jackpot is emphasized during the same fluctuation, and the joy of the player's jackpot is further amplified. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1 is larger than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 and the line LN5. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the jackpot can be emphasized by displaying the jackpot symbol array in a large size at the beginning of the jackpot display effect, and the joy of the player's jackpot can be further amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect D, after the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1, the jackpot symbol array is arranged on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 2. After a part is enlarged and displayed, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. According to this configuration, the jackpot can be emphasized by displaying the jackpot symbol array in a large size, and the joy of the player's jackpot can be further amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the jackpot symbol arrangement display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot symbol array display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the line LN4 may be displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot symbol array display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array arranged on the reach line LN1, the reach line LN2, the line LN4, the line LN5, and the line LN6 is one of the decorative symbols. The parts or all may overlap. Further, the jackpot symbol arrangement arranged on the reach line LN1, the reach line LN2, the line LN4, the line LN5, and the line LN6 may be made larger or smaller, and may be contracted. You may move.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot symbol array display effect D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the accessory movable effect is performed between the jackpot display effect 2 and the jackpot display effect 3, but the accessory movable effect is the jackpot display effect 1. And between the jackpot display effect 2 and the jackpot display effect 3 and the jackpot display effect 4, and between the jackpot display effect 4 and the jackpot game effect, these jackpot display effects or during the jackpot game effect should be performed. You may. Further, the size of the jackpot symbol array and the line on which the jackpot symbol array is displayed may change before and after this accessory movable effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on the first line of the display means to bring it into a reach state.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the first jackpot symbol array by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol on the first line.
The third display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on the second line, which is different from the first line in the display means, to bring the decorative symbol into a reach state.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying the second jackpot symbol array by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols on the first line and the third line different from the second line.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed and the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the first display effect and the third display effect are performed. After the display effect, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is a third jackpot symbol arrangement by stopping and displaying decorative symbols on the first line, the second line, and a fourth line different from the third line. Is a production that displays
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect and during the jackpot game.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the combination effect, the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed during the same fluctuation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-3.
The first jackpot symbol array in the second display effect is larger than the second jackpot symbol array in the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect of enlarging and displaying the first jackpot symbol array.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the sixth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the second display effect is performed, the sixth display effect is performed, and after the sixth display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. This decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect can be executed in relation to the variation display of the decorative symbol that is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"). The decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effects A, B, and C are the jackpot suggestions in the hold, and the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D is the jackpot suggestion of the fluctuation.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 68A, H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 68B, the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the fluctuation result shown in FIG. 68 (A) has been lost. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are provided with an upper line JL and a lower line GL as specified stop positions, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop after fluctuating to show a symbol arrangement, it is usually used. , Align horizontally along the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stop. That is, in the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (B), the lost symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is indicated by "869" in the upper line JL and "958" in the lower line GL.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (C), a left decorative symbol lower deviation stop effect may be executed. This left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect indicates a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R have stopped after fluctuating, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R stop at the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are the specified stop positions. However, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped by shifting downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are indicated by "77" in the upper line JL and "66" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by "5" and the lower line. It is shifted downward from GL and shows "6". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect is the symbol arrangement in which "5" of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the left of "666". "6" indicates a symbol arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R deviates from the specified stop position, the deviated symbol arrangement is obtained. Therefore, "666", which becomes a jackpot symbol array if stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the specified stop position, is also regarded as a lost symbol array in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C). Become.
In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but although not shown, the right decorative symbol 8R or the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the upper row. In the same way, the line JL and the lower line GL may be displaced downward and stopped.

Further, instead of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), a shift stop effect on the right decorative symbol may be executed. This right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect indicates a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have stopped after fluctuating, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C stop at the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are the specified stop positions. However, the left decorative symbol 8R is stopped by shifting upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are indicated by "68" in the upper line JL and "77" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbols 8L are shifted upward from the upper line JL by "8" and the lower line. It is shifted upward from GL and shows "7". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the right decorative symbol top shift stop effect is the symbol arrangement in which the right "8" of "688" is shifted upward from the upper line JL, "777". The "7" on the right side of the above indicates the symbol arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, "777", which becomes a jackpot symbol array when stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the specified stop position, is also regarded as a lost symbol array in the right decorative symbol top shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). Become.
In this example, the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but although not shown, the left decorative symbol 8L or the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the upper row. In the same way, the line JL and the lower line GL may be displaced upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect is an effect performed after the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) is performed. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this jackpot confirmation effect, the first special symbol is held from the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). It shows how two pieces have been digested. The jackpot symbol array "777" shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shows the variation result of the second hold of the first special symbol. Further, in the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed independently (one step) in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The characters "Big hit!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) was performed. Even in this case, it is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (B) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 68, when any of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the specified stop position and stops in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is likely to be a big hit in the fluctuation related to the hold after the predetermined fluctuation. In other words, in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, if there is a jackpot by pre-reading the contents of the hold, the decorative symbol 8L, as a jackpot suggestion effect, has a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.). Either 8C or 8R is deviated from the specified stop position to stop. Moreover, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A, the symbol array (lost symbol array) that is deviated from the specified stop position and stopped is indicated by the symbol array that becomes the jackpot symbol array if stopped at the specified stop position. This suggests (suggests) that it will be a big hit for the player.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect B.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 69A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 69A, H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect is executed. This left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect indicates a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R have stopped after changing, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R are the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are the specified stop positions. However, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and is stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are indicated by "77" in the upper line JL and "66" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by "5" and the lower line. It is shifted downward from GL and shows "6". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect is the symbol arrangement in which "5" of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the left of "666". "6" indicates a symbol arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R deviates from the specified stop position, the deviated symbol arrangement is obtained. Therefore, "666", which becomes a jackpot symbol array if stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the specified stop position, is also regarded as a lost symbol array in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C). Become.
In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but although not shown, the right decorative symbol 8R or the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the upper row. In the same way, the line JL and the lower line GL may be displaced downward and stopped.
Further, in the symbol arrangement in which the left "6" of the "666" is displaced downward from the lower line GL, water droplets are placed so as to surround the "6" which is the stop symbol of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The imitated blue effect image is displayed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 69 (B), as shown in FIG. 69 (C), a red effect effect of stopping the shift under the left decorative symbol may be executed. This left decorative symbol lower shift stop red effect effect is the same as the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) above, and the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is "577". Of "5", the symbol arrangement is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and "6" on the left of "666" is the symbol sequence shifted downward from the lower line GL. In the symbol array where the "6" on the left of is shifted downward from the lower line GL, a red effect image imitating a flame is displayed so as to surround the "6" which is the stop symbol of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss symbol stop effect is performed after the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative symbol lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C) is performed. Is. In this lost symbol stop effect, the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this loss symbol stop effect, the first is from the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative symbol lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C). It shows how two special symbols are reserved. That is, the lost symbol arrangement shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shows the variation result of the second hold of the first special symbol, "869" in the upper line JL and "958" in the lower line GL. "It is shown.
It should be noted that the probability that this lost symbol stop effect is performed is that the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) is performed when the left decorative symbol lower shift effect is performed. It is higher than when the stop red effect effect is performed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 69 (D), as shown in FIG. 69 (E), a jackpot confirmation effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect is shown in the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect or FIG. 69 (C) shown in FIG. 69 (B) in the same manner as the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 69 (D) described above. Left decorative pattern Stops shifting underneath This is an effect that is performed after the red effect effect is performed. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this jackpot confirmation effect, the first special from the left decorative symbol lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative symbol lower shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C). It shows how two symbols are held. That is, the jackpot symbol array "777" shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shows the variation result of the second hold of the first special symbol. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 69 (E), the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed independently (one step) in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The characters "Big hit!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The probability that this jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is that the left decorative symbol bottom shift stop as shown in FIG. 69 (C) and the left decorative symbol bottom shift stop as shown in FIG. 69 (B) when the red effect effect is performed. It is higher than when the blue effect effect is performed.

That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop fluctuating, a plurality of types of effect effects (blue effect effect and red effect effect in this example) can be executed. Therefore, the jackpot grant rate changes depending on the type of these effect effects. In other words, in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, if there is a big hit by pre-reading the contents of the hold, there are multiple types of effects as a big hit suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.). It is designed to perform a predetermined effect production from the production.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 70A, it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 70 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the left decorative symbol "6" lower shift stop effect is executed. This left decorative symbol "6" lower shift stop effect indicates a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R have stopped after changing, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R are the upper line JL and the lower line, which are the specified stop positions. Although it is stopped at GL, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped by shifting downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are indicated by "77" in the upper line JL and "66" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by "5" and the lower line. It is shifted downward from GL and shows "6". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left decorative symbol "6" lower shift stop effect is that of the symbol arrangement "666" in which "5" of "577" is displaced downward from the upper line JL. The "6" on the left side shows the symbol arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R deviates from the specified stop position, the deviated symbol arrangement is obtained. Therefore, "666", which becomes a jackpot symbol array if stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the specified stop position, is lost in the left decorative symbol "6" lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B). It becomes a symbol array.
In this example, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but although not shown, the right decorative symbol 8R or the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the upper row. In the same way, the line JL and the lower line GL may be displaced downward and stopped.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 70 (B), as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the right decorative symbol "7" upper shift stop effect may be executed. The right decorative symbol "7" upper shift stop effect indicates a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped after the fluctuation, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C are the upper line JL and the lower line, which are the specified stop positions. Although it is stopped at the GL, the left decorative symbol 8R is stopped by shifting upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are indicated by "68" in the upper line JL and "77" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbols 8L are shifted upward from the upper line JL by "8" and the lower line. It is shifted upward from GL and shows "7". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the right decorative symbol "7" upper deviation stop effect is the symbol arrangement "777" in which the right "8" of "688" is displaced upward from the upper line JL. The "7" on the right of "" indicates the symbol arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, "777", which becomes a jackpot symbol array if stopped at the upper line JL or the lower line GL, which is the specified stop position, is lost in the right decorative symbol "7" upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C). It becomes a symbol array.
In this example, the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped, but although not shown, the left decorative symbol 8L or the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the upper row. In the same way, the line JL and the lower line GL may be displaced upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol "6" shown in FIG. 70 (B) is stopped from being displaced downward, or the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. 70 (C) is stopped from being displaced upward. Is. In this reach effect, the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this reach effect, the first from the left decorative symbol "6" lower shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative symbol "7" upper shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C). It shows how two special symbols are reserved. Then, the lost symbol array "68" of the upper line JL and the reach symbol array "77" of the lower line GL in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped correspond to the fluctuation of the second hold of the first special symbol. ing. Further, in the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.
The reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is the left decorative symbol “6” shown in FIG. 70 (B) to stop shifting downward or the right decorative symbol “7” shown in FIG. 70 (C) to stop shifting upward. Even if the production is performed, it is not always performed and it may not reach. Further, the probability that this reach effect is performed is that the right decorative symbol “7” shown in FIG. 70 (C) and the left decorative symbol “6” shown in FIG. 70 (B) are performed when the upper shift stop effect is performed. It is higher than when the lower shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect that is switched from the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), and instead of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. The image is displayed. That is, the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E) is performed when the game state is reach. In this battle effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate "1" and "0" as in the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D).
Note that the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E) is not always performed even when the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is performed, and the reach effect does not develop into a battle effect. There can also be. In addition, the probability that this battle effect will be performed (battle development rate) is higher when the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. 70 (C) is stopped from shifting, and the left is shown in FIG. 70 (B). Decorative pattern "6" is higher than when the lower shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation suggestion effect, the characters "victory!", Which indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, are displayed in large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "Victory!", It is possible to make the player think that this reach will be a big hit (a privilege that is advantageous to the player will be given). In this jackpot confirmation suggestion effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate "1" and "0" as in the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) and the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). ing.
Further, although not shown, the ally character may be defeated in the battle effect. In this case, the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed, and instead, the ally character is defeated. The words "Defeated!" Are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "defeated!", It is possible to make the player think that this reach will not be a big hit (the player will not be given a favorable privilege).
The probability that the ally character CRA will win in the battle production (battle victory expectation) is higher in Fig. 70 (B) when the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. 70 (C) is stopped. ) Shows the left decorative symbol "6", which is higher than when the downward shift stop effect is performed. In other words, the probability that the ally character CRA will be defeated in the battle effect is higher when the left decorative symbol "6" shown in FIG. 70 (B) is stopped from shifting, and the right decoration shown in FIG. It is higher than when the design "7" upper deviation stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot confirmation effect, the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed in place of the characters "victory!", Which indicates that the ally character CRA has won in the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F). With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 70 (G), the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed independently (one step) in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, The characters "Big hit!" Are displayed.
As described above, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) was not performed (when the reach was not achieved), the reach effect did not develop into the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). In the case, and when the ally character CRA is eliminated in the battle production and the jackpot confirmation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed, the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 70 (G) is performed. Instead, a loss confirmation effect is performed (see FIGS. 68 (B) and 69 (D)).

That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C shown in FIG. 70, when any of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the specified stop position and stops in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Depending on the type of the misaligned symbol arrangement, the rate of reaching, the rate of development to post-reach battle, and the degree of expectation of battle victory in the battle production will change in the fluctuation related to the hold after the predetermined fluctuation. There is. For example, as described above, the rate of reaching "777", the rate of development into post-reach battle, and the expectation of battle victory in battle production are higher when the misaligned symbol arrangement is "766" than when it is "666". ing. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C, a plurality of game indexes such as reach rate, battle development rate, and battle victory expectation are simultaneously suggested by one effect of displaying the shifted symbol arrangement.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion production D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D.
In the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 71 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 68A, H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the lower “6” symbol reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The lower "6" symbol reach effect indicates that in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in sequence, resulting in reach. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are provided with an upper line JL and a lower line GL as symbol arrangement lines, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop after changing and show a symbol arrangement, two symbols Stops at the same time, and stops horizontally aligned along the upper line JL and the lower line GL. That is, in the lower "6" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two rows. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are "57" in the upper line JL. "66" indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the lower “6” symbol reach loss effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The lower "6" symbol reach loss effect indicates that the result of the lower "6" symbol reach loss effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) has been lost. That is, in the lower "6" symbol reach loss effect shown in FIG. 71 (C), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped, and as a result of the fluctuation, the loss symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two rows. In this example, the lost symbol arrangement is indicated by "587" in the upper line JL and "676" indicating the reach lost state in the lower line GL.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 71 (B), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the lower “7” symbol reach effect may be executed. The lower "7" symbol reach effect indicates that in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped, resulting in reach. That is, in the lower "7" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two rows. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are "67" in the upper line JL. "77" indicating the reach state is displayed on the lower line GL.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), the “7” symbol jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This "7" symbol jackpot confirmation effect is an effect performed after the lower "7" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. This "7" symbol jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the lower "7" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is a jackpot. In the "7" symbol jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 71 (E), the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed independently (1 step) in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At the top, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed. With this "7" symbol jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced that he has hit the jackpot with the "7" symbol.

Further, instead of FIGS. 71 (B) and 71 (D), as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the upper “8” symbol reach effect may be executed. The upper "8" symbol reach effect indicates that in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in sequence, resulting in reach. That is, in the upper "8" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F), the symbol arrangement is shown in the upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R indicate the reach state in the upper line JL. "88" is displayed, and "97" is displayed on the lower line GL.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), the “8” symbol jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This "8" symbol jackpot confirmation effect is an effect performed after the upper "8" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. This "8" symbol jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the upper "8" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is a jackpot. In the "8" symbol jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 71 (G), the jackpot symbol array "888" is displayed independently (1 step) in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At the top, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed. With this "8" symbol jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced that he has hit the jackpot with the "8" symbol.

It should be noted that the lower "6" symbol reach loss effect shown in FIG. 71 (C) described above is always performed even when the lower "6" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed. Instead, as in FIGS. 71 (E) and 71 (G), there may be a case where the “6” symbol jackpot confirmation effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Further, the “7” symbol jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 71 (E) described above is always performed even when the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. Instead, as in FIG. 71 (C), there is a possibility that the lower “7” symbol reach loss effect is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is higher than the case where the lower "6" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed, and the lower "7" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. It is higher when it is.
Further, the “8” symbol jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 71 (G) described above is always performed even when the upper “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. Instead, as in FIG. 71 (C), the upper "8" symbol reach loss effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Further, although not shown, even if the reach effect is performed on the upper line JL with a symbol other than the “8” symbol, the jackpot confirmation effect is performed with a predetermined probability as in FIG. 71 (G). It is possible that However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is that the upper "8" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed compared to the case where the reach effect is performed on the upper line JL with a symbol other than the "8" symbol. It is higher when it is.

That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 71, a plurality of left decorative symbols 8L and a plurality of right decorative symbols 8R are stopped at a predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a plurality of symbol arrangement lines (book) In the example, the upper line JL and the lower line GL) can be displayed, and when the predetermined left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the predetermined symbol arrangement line among the plurality of symbol arrangement lines (in this example). , The reach of the "88" symbol on the upper line JL and the reach of the "77" symbol on the lower line GL) are likely to be big hits in the predetermined fluctuation. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect D, when the predetermined symbol arrangement line reaches the predetermined symbol arrangement, the jackpot expectation is high. In other words, in the predetermined fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, when the fluctuation becomes a big hit, a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.) is performed on a predetermined symbol arrangement line as a jackpot suggestion effect. Reach production is performed with a pattern arrangement.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, there are cases where the decorative symbol is stopped at a specified stop position and a case where the decorative symbol is stopped at a predetermined stop position in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the vehicle is stopped at the specified stop position, it is more likely to be a big hit in the fluctuation related to the hold after the predetermined fluctuation than when the vehicle is stopped at the specified stop position. According to this configuration, the player can face the game with great expectation when any of the decorative symbols deviates from the specified stop position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. It is also possible to associate the misaligned decorative symbol with the jackpot expectation and change the jackpot expectation depending on the type of the misaligned decorative symbol.

[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol, and stops the decorative symbol at a predetermined stop position. When the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped in a row, and the decorative symbol is shifted from the specified stop position and stopped, the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol Any one of the 2 decorative symbols and the 3rd decorative symbol is displaced from the line and stopped. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol is deviated from the specified stop position and stopped, it is possible to display the decorative symbol in various modes in an easy-to-understand manner. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, a plurality of types of effect effects can be executed in connection with the stop of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot grant rate to the player is the effect effect. It has a structure that changes depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player is delighted every time the effect effect is produced, and when the effect effect with a high expectation of a big hit is performed, the player can face the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the decorative symbol has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is a third decorative symbol. It is possible to stop after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, stop a plurality of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol, and display a plurality of symbol array lines at the same time. When the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the predetermined symbol arrangement line among the plurality of symbol arrangement lines, the configuration is such that a big hit is likely to occur in the predetermined fluctuation. According to this configuration, when the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop on the predetermined symbol arrangement line, the player has a high expectation of a big hit, and then stops. While the decorative pattern is changing, you can keep an eye on it while maintaining great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in a stepped manner, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in a predetermined step of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in a stepped manner. And when the second decorative symbol is stopped and reaches in a predetermined symbol arrangement, the configuration is such that a big hit is likely to occur in the predetermined fluctuation. According to this configuration, when the player reaches the reach with the predetermined symbol arrangement on the symbol arrangement line of the predetermined stage, the jackpot expectation is extremely high, and the player is in the process of changing the third decorative symbol that stops thereafter. , You can keep an eye on it while sustaining great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. It is also possible to associate the reach symbol in the symbol arrangement line of the predetermined stage with the jackpot expectation and change the jackpot expectation depending on the type of reach symbol.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern jackpot suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, two stages of the upper line JL and the lower line GL are shown as the specified stop positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is not limited to this. For example, the specified stop positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be three steps of the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line, or four or more steps above and below. Further, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R scroll horizontally, a plurality of vertical lines (left line, middle line, right line) may be set as a predetermined stop position in the left-right direction.
Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the symbol arrangement lines show two lines, the upper line JL and the lower line GL, but the three lines of the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line are the same as the above-defined stop positions. , Up and down 4 lines or more may be used. Further, when there are three or more upper and lower symbol arrangement lines, an oblique symbol arrangement line may be provided in addition to the diagonal symbol arrangement line (for example, in the case of three upper and lower lines, two diagonal symbols, rising to the right and falling to the right). Array line). Further, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R scroll horizontally, a plurality of vertical symbol arrangement lines (for example, left symbol arrangement line, middle symbol arrangement line, right symbol arrangement line) are provided in the left-right direction. It may be.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at the specified stop position, the symbol arrangement is stopped at the specified stop position. Although the symbol arrangement is a jackpot symbol arrangement, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol arrangement that deviates from the specified stop position and stops may be a symbol arrangement having a specific disparity or reach. Furthermore, in the case of a symbol array that has been displaced and stopped, if it is stopped at the specified stop position, it will be a jackpot symbol array, and if it becomes a jackpot in the hold after that, it will be the symbol array that has been displaced and stopped. The jackpot symbol array may be displayed in the same symbol array. With this configuration, not only the jackpot suggestion but also the jackpot symbol arrangement can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine in advance whether or not the jackpot this time is a probabilistic jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displaced from the specified stop positions and stopped, an effect using a color called a blue effect effect or a red effect is performed. The jackpot grant rate is changed according to the type of these effect effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect effect may use three or more kinds of colors, and the jackpot grant rate may be changed depending on the difference between these colors. Alternatively, in the effect effect, a plurality of types of characters may be used instead of the colors, and the jackpot grant rate may be changed depending on the types of these characters. Of course, the effect may be produced by using both the color and the character. Furthermore, for the effect production, a blue effect image imitating water droplets and a red effect image imitating a flame were used, but these water droplets and flames are not particularly limited, and what kind of image is the effect image? It may be (although an image that gives a feeling of a specific color is desirable).

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displaced from the specified stop positions and stopped, a battle effect is performed with a predetermined probability, and the result of this battle effect is used. I tried to suggest a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a story production may be performed instead of the battle production, and a jackpot may be suggested according to the content of the story production. In this case, depending on the type of the misaligned symbol arrangement, the rate of reaching within the subsequent hold, the rate of development to the story effect after reach, and the content (big hit expectation) in the story effect may be changed. With this configuration, one effect of displaying a misaligned pattern array suggests multiple game indicators at the same time, such as the reach rate within the subsequent hold, the story effect development rate, and the jackpot expectation in the story effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, among the plurality of symbol arrangement lines, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol are placed on the predetermined symbol arrangement line. By stopping the 8R and displaying a predetermined reach symbol, it is suggested that the predetermined fluctuation is likely to be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped on the predetermined symbol arrangement line and a specific variation other than the reach is displayed, it may be suggested that the predetermined fluctuation is likely to be a big hit. Good. Then, in this case, after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at random stitches, a so-called pseudo-rearrangement in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are revariated is immediately performed, and then the left decorative symbol 8L is placed on the predetermined symbol arrangement line. The right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped to display a predetermined reach symbol. With this configuration, the interest of the game can be further improved.
The pseudo-ream is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol appears to be continuous for a predetermined number of times, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of the variation or during the reach effect. For example, the pseudo-ream has an effect of repeating an effect of fluctuating and temporarily stopping a decorative symbol, an effect of repeating an effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined arrangement of decorative symbols, and a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT). Includes an effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping, or an effect of executing a variable effect of a decorative pattern, as well as a display reminiscent of a pseudo-ream such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo". It should be noted that the number of times of repeated production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-reams, and if it is 2 times, it may be expressed as "pseudo 2" or "x2", and if it is 3 times, it may be expressed as "pseudo 3" or "x3".

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A symbol display means that can display a variable display of a symbol,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
It is a game machine equipped with
In a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display means, the decorative symbol may be stopped at a specified stop position or may be stopped at a specified stop position.
When the vehicle is stopped at the specified stop position, a privilege advantageous to the player is more likely to be given in the fluctuation related to the hold after the predetermined change than when the vehicle is stopped at the specified stop position.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-2]
The decorative symbol has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.
The decorative pattern display means
When the decorative symbol is stopped at the specified stop position, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped in a row.
When the decorative symbol is displaced from the specified stop position and stopped, any one of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is displaced from the one row and stopped. ,
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1.
[Aspect A6-3]
Equipped with display means that can execute multiple display effects
The display means can execute a plurality of types of effect effects related to the stop of the decorative symbol as one of the plurality of display effects.
The rate of granting advantageous benefits to the player varies depending on the type of effect effect.
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1 or the aspect A6-2.
[Aspect A6-4]
A symbol display means that can display a variable display of a symbol,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
It is a game machine equipped with
The decorative symbol has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is more than the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Shall stop later
The decorative symbol display means can stop a plurality of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol and display a plurality of symbol array lines at the same time in a predetermined variation.
When the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the predetermined symbol arrangement line among the plurality of symbol arrangement lines, a privilege advantageous to the player is given in the predetermined variation. Cheap,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect A6-5]
The plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in a stepped manner.
When the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at a predetermined stage of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in a stepped manner and reach in a predetermined symbol arrangement, the predetermined variation It is easy to give benefits to the player in
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-4.

The decorative pattern superimposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. This decorative pattern superimposition effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol superimposition effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. In the decorative symbol superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the decorative symbol non-display effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed during the variable effect is performed. Will be executed. The decorative symbol non-display effect is the same as the decorative symbol disappearance effect of the decorative symbol variation effect A shown in FIG. 48 (J). That is, the effects of FIGS. 48 (A) to 48 (I) of the decorative symbol variation effect A may be performed before the decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 72 (A). Note that the decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 72 (A) is such that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed, and even if any other image is displayed. Good. For example, any special reach effect may be performed.

Next, the decorative symbol enlarged display effect shown in FIG. 72 (B) is executed. Specifically, a part of each of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. It is displayed overlapping a part. Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the jackpot image superimposition display effect is executed. Specifically, the first jackpot image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third jackpot image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative symbol 8R. Is displayed. The first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are images written as "big hit", respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration. It suggests that it is a big hit that combines the design 8R. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first jackpot image MF1, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third jackpot image MF3.

Next, the decorative symbol reduction display effect shown in FIG. 72 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each reduced and displayed. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap with the first jackpot image MF1, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap with the third jackpot image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 72 (C) to FIG. 72 (D), the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C overlaps the first jackpot image MF1 changes to the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the first jackpot image MF1. The transition is made from a state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C overlaps the third jackpot image MF3 to a state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the third jackpot image MF3.

Next, the special jackpot image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 72 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first jackpot image MF1 is displayed with the first special jackpot image MS1 superimposed, the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed with the second special jackpot image MS2 superimposed, and the third jackpot image MF3 is displayed with the third special. The jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as "special jackpot", respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, It also suggests that the combined jackpot of the right decorative symbol 8R is special, that is, it is a probabilistic jackpot. In other words, the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 suggest a jackpot type. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the third special jackpot image MS3. The first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed so as to be visible in a part of the first jackpot image MF1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed so that a part of the second jackpot image MF2 is visible. The third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping with the third jackpot image MF3 so that a part of the third jackpot image MF3 can be visually recognized.

[Decorative pattern superimposition production B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect B. The decorative symbol superimposition effect B is different from the decorative symbol superimposition effect A in that the jackpot images MF1 to MF3 are displayed at different timings. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 73 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. Next, the jackpot image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 73 (B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are newly displayed from the state where they are not displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1 is already displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L, the second jackpot image MF2 is superimposed on the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third jackpot image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative symbol 8R. It is displayed. The first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are images written as "big hit", respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration. It suggests that it is a big hit that combines the design 8R. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed overlapping a part of the first jackpot image MF1, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed overlapping a part of the third jackpot image MF3.

Next, the decorative symbol reduced display effect shown in FIG. 73 (C) is executed. The decorative symbol reduction display effect of FIG. 73 (C) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (D) of the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each reduced and displayed. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap with the first jackpot image MF1, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap with the third jackpot image MF3.

Next, the special jackpot image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. The special jackpot image superimposition display effect of FIG. 73 (D) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (E) of the decorative pattern superimposition effect A. Specifically, the first jackpot image MF1 is displayed with the first special jackpot image MS1 superimposed, the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed with the second special jackpot image MS2 superimposed, and the third jackpot image MF3 is displayed with the third special. The jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as "special jackpot", respectively, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, It also suggests that the combined jackpot of the right decorative symbol 8R is special, that is, it is a probabilistic jackpot. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping a part of the third special jackpot image MS3.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect C. The decorative symbol superimposing effect C is different from the decorative symbol superimposing effect A in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 74 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superimposition effect A. The decorative symbol enlarged display effect of FIG. 74 (B) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (B) of the decorative symbol superimposition effect A.

Next, the predetermined image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 74 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, the second image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third image MF3 is displayed overlapping the right decorative symbol 8R. .. The first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are images written as "HELLO", respectively. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first image MF1, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the third image MF3.

Next, the decorative symbol reduced display effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each reduced and displayed. At this time, the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. Due to this reduction, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap with the first image MF1, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap with the third image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 74 (C) to FIG. 74 (D), the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C overlaps the first image MF1 changes to the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the first image MF1. , The state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C overlaps the third image MF3 is changed to the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the third image MF3.

Next, the special jackpot image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 74 (E) is executed. Specifically, the special jackpot image MS is displayed so as to overlap the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3. The special jackpot image MS is an image written as "special jackpot", and the jackpot that combines the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is special, that is, it is a probability variation jackpot. It suggests that. In other words, the special jackpot image MS suggests a jackpot type. The special jackpot image MS is displayed so as to be visible in parts of the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3.

[Decorative pattern superimposition effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superimposition effect D. The decorative symbol superimposition effect D is different from the decorative symbol superimposition effect A in that the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3 and the display conditions are different. First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped due to a loss is displayed during the variation effect. Next, the suggested image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 75 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first suggestion image MF1 is superimposed on the left decorative symbol 8L, the second suggestion image MF2 is superimposed on the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third suggestion image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative symbol 8R. Is displayed. The first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3 are images with "Moshiya!", "No way!", And "!!!", respectively, and are being temporarily stopped. It is suggested that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may not yet be confirmed. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed overlapping a part of the first suggested image MF1, or the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be displayed overlapping a part of the third suggested image MF3.

Next, the special suggestion image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 75 (C) is executed. Specifically, the special suggestion image MS is displayed on the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3. The special suggestion image MS is an image written as "No way !!!", and there is a high possibility that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the temporary stop display are not confirmed displays. It suggests that. In other words, the special suggestion image MS suggests the start of the pseudo-continuous production and suggests that the expectation of the jackpot has increased. The special suggestion image MS is displayed so as to be visible in parts of the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the temporary stop display are displayed in a variable manner again, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern superimposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the first jackpot image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, and the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed overlapping the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. , The first effect in which the third jackpot image MF3 is overlapped and displayed on the right decorative symbol 8R, and after the first effect, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed on the first jackpot image MF1 in an overlapping manner, and the second It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second special jackpot image MS2 is overlapped and displayed on the jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed on the third jackpot image MF3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (C) and 73 (C), in the first effect, after the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the third jackpot image MF3 in an overlapping manner, the figure is shown. As shown in 72 (D) and 73 (D), the transition to a state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not overlap with the third jackpot image MF3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (C) and 73 (C), in the first effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to overlap the first jackpot image MF1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) and 73 (E), in the second effect, the first special jackpot image MS1 and the second special jackpot image MS2 are displayed overlapping. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping with the third special jackpot image MS3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) and 73 (E), in the second production, the first special jackpot is made so that a part of the first jackpot image MF1 can be visually recognized. The image MS1 is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the second jackpot image MF2 can be visually recognized. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the third jackpot image MF3 can be visually recognized. The third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) and 73 (E), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are combined. Suggests a jackpot, and the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 suggest the type of jackpot. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern superimposition effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 72 (B) to 72 (E), images other than the images illustrated above may be included. For example, in FIGS. 72 (B) to 48 (E), a right-handed image or the like may be displayed in addition to the decorative design. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image having the same contents as the first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image having the same contents as the first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image having a content different from that of the first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a fifth image having the same contents as the fourth image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a sixth image having the same contents as the fourth image.
The first image is superimposed on the first decorative symbol, the second image is superimposed on the second decorative symbol, and the third image is superimposed on the third decorative symbol. The first effect displayed in
After the first effect, the fourth image is superposed on the first image, the fifth image is superposed on the second image, and the third image is overlaid with the third image. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a second effect in which images of 6 are displayed in an overlapping manner.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1.
The first effect is characterized in that after the second decorative symbol is overlapped and displayed on the third image, the transition to a state in which the second decorative symbol does not overlap the third image is performed. A game machine to play.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A7-1 or the aspect A7-2.
In the first effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the second decorative pattern is superimposed and displayed on the first image.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3.
In the second effect, the fifth image is superposed on the fourth image and displayed, and the fifth image is superposed on the sixth image.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-4.
In the second effect, the fourth image is overlapped and displayed so that a part of the first image is visible, and the second image is visible so that a part of the second image is visible. A gaming machine characterized in that the images of 5 are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the sixth image is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the third image can be visually recognized.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5.
In the second effect, the combination of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol suggests a big hit, and the fourth image and the fifth The image of the above and the sixth image are game machines characterized in that they suggest the type of jackpot.

The jackpot background display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. This jackpot background display effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, during the jackpot game, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the jackpot background display effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big hit background display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect A.
This jackpot background display effect A is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot effect 1, the background image HK1 and the jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "6" symbols. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of the "6" symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probabilistic state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the jackpot effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot effect 2, the background image HK2 (crosshatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the jackpot effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 revariates on the background image HK2.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "7" symbols. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2, suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect B.
This jackpot background display effect B is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot effect 1, the background image HK1 and the jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "6" symbols. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of the "6" symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probabilistic state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the jackpot effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot effect 2, the background image HK2 (crosshatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the jackpot effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 revariates on the background image HK2. Further, in the jackpot effect 3, the button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to urge the player to press the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, when the player presses the effect button 63, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "7" symbols. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2, suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect C.
This jackpot background display effect C is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot effect 1, the background image HK1 and the jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "6" symbols. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of the "6" symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probabilistic state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the jackpot effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot effect 2, the background image HK2 (crosshatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is larger than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the jackpot effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 revariates on the background image HK2. Further, in the jackpot effect 3, the button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to urge the player to press the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, when the player presses the effect button 63, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "7" symbols. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2, suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

[Big hit background display effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot background display effect D.
This jackpot background display effect D is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the jackpot effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot effect 1, the background image HK1 and the jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are performing a battle effect. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "6" symbols. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array of the "6" symbol is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probabilistic state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the jackpot effect 2 is executed. In this jackpot effect 2, the background image HK2 (crosshatch portion) is displayed as the background image of the jackpot symbol array A81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2, and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. Further, the background image HK2 is arranged in the background image HK1 and is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the jackpot effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 revariates on the background image HK2. Further, in the jackpot effect 3, the button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is arranged on the boundary portion (on the boundary line KL) between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. This button image BTN is displayed to urge the player to press the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, when the player presses the effect button 63, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2. The jackpot symbol array A81 is composed of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are doublets of "7" symbols. This jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the time of the jackpot effect 2, and is a jackpot symbol array suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a probable change state.

The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2, suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probabilistic state. The jackpot symbol array is not limited to this, and may be the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the jackpot effect 5 is executed. In the jackpot effect 5, the background image HK2 is erased, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Further, the display position of the jackpot symbol array A81 moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and is displayed larger than that in the jackpot effect 4.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the jackpot background display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, when the background image HK1 is displayed and the background image HK1 is displayed, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is the background image HK1. The background image HK2 is displayed, and the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1 when the background image HK1 is displayed after the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed. When the background image HK2 is displayed, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. According to this configuration, at the time of a jackpot, the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. Therefore, the background image HK1 produces a predetermined effect. While doing so, the jackpot symbol array A81 can be emphasized. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the production in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a boundary line KL is provided between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 in the jackpot background display effect. According to this configuration, the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 is clarified, so that the player can clarify the distinction between the effect performed by the background image HK1 and the display of the jackpot symbol array A81. it can. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the production in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1 in the jackpot background display effects A, B, and D. According to this configuration, even if the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, the predetermined effect in the background image HK1 can be meaningfully enjoyed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 2 is a jackpot symbol array in which it cannot be determined whether the game state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a probable change state. The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2, suggesting that the gaming state after the jackpot will be in a probable change state. It is a jackpot symbol array. Then, in both the jackpot effect 2 and the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is performed in the area in front of the background image HK2 and where the background image HK2 is displayed. According to this configuration, a re-lottery effect of changing from a jackpot symbol array suggesting that it is relatively disadvantageous to the player to a jackpot symbol array suggesting that it is relatively advantageous to the player is placed in front of the background image HK1. Since the displayed background image HK2 can be executed as a background, this re-lottery effect can be impressed on the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect D, the background image HK2 is erased after the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, the jackpot symbol array A81 can be further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2 is a symbol array using the same symbol. According to this configuration, the jackpot symbol array A81 can be further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative pattern variation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot background display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol arrangement A81 may be different between the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot background display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the position of the background image HK2 may be the upper left, the lower left, the lower right, or the center of the background image HK1. Further, the game machine 1 may have a display device different from that of the image display device 7. Then, the background image HK1 may be displayed on a display device different from the image display device 7, and the background image HK2 may be displayed on the display device.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot background display effect B of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BTN may be displayed in a plurality of patterns (for example, colors and patterns). In this case, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the display mode of the button image BTN. Further, when the button image BTN is displayed, the effect button 63 may be illuminated in a plurality of patterns. In this case, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on how the effect button 63 is illuminated.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A8-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first background image.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the first jackpot symbol array representing the jackpot.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a second background image.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the first jackpot in the second display effect is performed. The symbol arrangement is displayed in front of the first background image of the first display effect, and when the first display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed. The third display effect is performed, and the second background image in the third display effect is arranged in front of the first background image in the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed. Is performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and the second jackpot symbol arrangement in the fourth display effect is in front of the second background image of the third display effect. Is displayed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-1.
When the second background image is arranged in front of the first background image, a predetermined line is arranged at the boundary between the second background image and the first background image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-2.
When the second background image is arranged in the first background image, the area where the second background image is displayed is smaller than the area where the first background image is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of changing the second jackpot symbol array to a third jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot.
The jackpot represented by the third jackpot symbol array is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot represented by the second jackpot symbol array.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect is an area in which the second background image of the third display effect is displayed. It is done in
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A8-4.
In the combination effect, after the fifth display effect, the display of the second background image in the third display effect is terminated, and thereafter, the third jackpot symbol array is the first background image. Displayed in the foreground,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 5.
The first jackpot symbol array and the second jackpot symbol array are the same symbol array.
A game machine characterized by that.

The plurality of timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. This multiple timer effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a plurality of timer effects, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Multiple timer production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of timer effects A. The timer effects of FIGS. 80 (A) to 80 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the plurality of timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 80 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" The number of seconds from "01" to "99") is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display / countdown effect shown in FIGS. 80 (C) and 80 (D) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "30" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. The random number display here means that the numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1 (1 second).

After the random number display / countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 80 (E). When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 is displaying "28", the second timer TM2 displays "10" as the remaining period after displaying the random number, and then the countdown is started. To. At the start of the countdown, the second timer TM2 slows down the numerical value switching speed. As a result, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the second timer TM2 starts the countdown (after the start), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes the countdown for a while as shown in FIG. 80 (F) (double countdown effect). ). After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 80 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 80 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Multiple timer production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of timer effects B. Compared with the plural timer effect A, the plurality timer effect B is different in the number of displayed timer images and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effect of FIGS. 81 (A) to 81 (J) is executed within the same variation (within one variation effect period). In the plurality of timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "001" to "999"). The number of seconds) is displayed. When the first timer TM1 is displayed, "100" is displayed as the remaining period, and then the countdown is started (started). As in the case of the plurality of timer effect A, the certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary that some change in the display occurs when the certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the second timer TM2 is displayed while the first timer TM1 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, which is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started) and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here means that the numerical values between "000" and "999" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1 (1 second). The countdown of the first timer TM1 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, the third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed. The third timer TM3 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "60", and the countdown is started (started). Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is started, the remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays "55" and the remaining period of the third timer IM3 displays "55", the second timer TM2 remains after displaying the random number. "10" is displayed as the period of, and then the countdown is started. At the start of the countdown, the second timer TM2 slows down the numerical value switching speed. As a result, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After each of the three timers TM1 to TM3 executes the countdown, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. 81 (F). , The first expectation suggestion production is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (H). In the third expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third timer TM3 is drawn with "heat !!" at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. The expectation suggestion image EI3 is displayed. Here, the content of the third expectation suggestion image EI3 is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 81 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first and third expectation degree suggestion effects, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

[Multiple timer production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of timer effects C. Compared with the plurality of timer effects A, the plurality of timer effects C have different configurations of timer images and display contents of the timer images before starting. The timer effects of FIGS. 82 (A) to 82 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the plurality of timer effect C, first, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 82 (A) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 have a frame image formed around the two-digit digital display, and have an "ON" or "OFF" display next to the frame image. The second timer TM2 has a mode in which the shutter is closed and the digital display cannot be seen. “ON” and “OFF” shown next to the frame images of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate whether or not the shutter is open. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from "01" to "99") until a certain time point is reached by the countdown. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 82 (B) and 82 (C), the first timer countdown effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "30" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started), and the shutter is closed. Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), when the shutter of the second timer TM2 is opened, the digital display displayed as "10" becomes visible. That is, the remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the second timer TM2 countdown is started (started).

After the second timer TM2 starts the countdown (after the start), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes the countdown for a while as shown in FIG. 82 (F) (double countdown effect). ). After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Multiple timer production D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of timer effects D. The multiple timer effect D is different from the multiple timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects of FIGS. 83 (A) to 83 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the plurality of timer effect D, first, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 83A is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are rod-shaped meters, and represent the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meters reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 suggest that the remaining period is shortened by decreasing the remaining amount of the meter, and reach a certain point when the remaining amount of the meter runs out (becomes zero). Suggests. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83B, the first timer start effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the meter is full, and then the meter remaining amount starts to decrease (starts). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display, and the meter does not decrease. Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, the third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed. The third timer TM3 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. When the third timer TM3 is displayed, the remaining amount smaller than the remaining amount of the meter of the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, the reduction of the remaining amount of the meter is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the second timer TM2 is started. That is, the reduction of the remaining meter amount of the second timer TM2 is started. Immediately after the start of the second timer TM2, a remaining amount smaller than the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and a larger remaining amount than the meter remaining amount of the third timer TM3 is displayed. Then, the reduction of the remaining amount of the meter is started. After that, for a while, the remaining amount of the meter decreases in each of the three timers. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), when the remaining meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (F). In the third expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining meter amount (remaining period) of the 3rd timer TM3 becomes zero, the display of the 3rd timer TM3 disappears, and "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the 3rd timer TM3 is displayed. 3 Expectation suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), when the remaining meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (H). .. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining meter amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and "heat !!" is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The first expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the content of the first expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), when the remaining meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (J). .. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining meter amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "super hot!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the multiple timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display is as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C), 82 (B) (C), and 83 (B) (C). The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the screen 7a, and the first effect in which the first timer TM1 is started while the second timer TM2 is not started, and FIG. 80 (D). As shown in FIGS. 81 (D), 82 (D), and 83 (D), after the first effect, the second timer TM2 is started and the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. A second effect, in which the second timer TM2 displays a shorter remaining period, can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C), and 82 (B) (C), in the first production, the second timer TM2 Is displayed as a random number on a digital display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (G) (H), 81 (G) (H), 82 (G) (H), and 83 (G) (H), After the effect of 2, the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is exhausted, and the first expectation degree is at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. A third effect in which the suggested image EI1 is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (I) (J), 81 (I) (J), 82 (I) (J), and 83 (I) (J), After the effect of 3, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 disappears, and the fourth effect in which the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 is displayed can be executed. it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J), and 83 (H) (J), The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are executed during the variable effect, and the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 and the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is a suggestion image that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J), and 83 (H) (J), 2 Expectation suggestion image The jackpot expectation suggested by EI2 may be higher than the jackpot expectation suggested by the first expectation suggestion image EI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the multiple timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80 (J)), it is assumed that the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays the content having a higher expectation degree of the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. However, the second expectation suggestion image EI2 may display the content having a lower expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1, or may display the content having the same expectation. Further, in FIG. 81 (J), it is assumed that the second expectation suggestion image EI2 displays the content having a higher expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI31. .. However, the second expectation suggestion image EI2 may display contents having a lower expectation of a jackpot than at least one of the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI3, and the expectation is the same. The content may be displayed.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 becomes "0", the expectation degree suggestion images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expected degree suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an image of the operation unit may be displayed, or an image in which the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80B), the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is assumed to be faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. However, the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 may be the same as or slower than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Further, the second timer TM2 may be stopped in a state where a specific numerical value is displayed without displaying a random number.
[Modification example 4]
As described above (eg, FIG. 80), the timer may include other image elements as well as parts that change over time (eg, digital display parts). For example, the timer may be an image digitally displayed in the middle of the triangular image. In this case, the triangular image portion also corresponds to the timer. An image in which the digital display portion is temporarily difficult to see also corresponds to a timer.
[Modification 5]
In the above timer speed effect, it is assumed that the timer effect is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point in time is reached.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point in time is reached.
A first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, and the first timer is started while the second timer is not started.
After the first effect, the second timer is started, and the second timer displays the remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. A game machine characterized by being able to execute.
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
The second timer indicates the remaining period by a countdown on the digital display.
In the first effect, the second timer is a gaming machine characterized in that a random number is displayed on the digital display.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first predetermined image, and is
After the second effect, in a state where the first timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer is exhausted, and the position where the second timer is displayed is reached. , A gaming machine characterized in that a third effect in which the first predetermined image is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second predetermined image, and is
After the third effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and a fourth effect in which the second predetermined image is displayed at the position where the first timer is displayed is executed. A game machine characterized by being possible.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-4.
The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are executed during the variable effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are suggestive images suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the expected degree of jackpot suggested by the second predetermined image may be higher than the expected degree of jackpot suggested by the first predetermined image.

The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. This timer effect may be executed in relation to the variation display of the decorative symbol that is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). For example, it can be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like.

[Timer production A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A.
In the timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution enable / disable effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the symbol inside The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 84 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect is executed in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, when the ally character CRA wins, the timer effect is executed, and when the ally character CRA loses, the timer is executed. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the timer effect impossibility suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect impossibility suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), the characters "defeated!" By displaying the characters "defeated!", It is suggested that the timer effect is not executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84C, the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 84 (A) have been lost. In this example, "958" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 84 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), a timer effect suggestive effect may be executed. In this timer effect suggestion effect, the characters "victory!", Which indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "victory!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 84 (A). The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 84 (E), 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 84 (E) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the jackpot expectation suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot expectation suggestion effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this jackpot expectation suggestion effect, the timer image TM is erased, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined jackpot expectation suggestion is made in the center of the display screen 7a. Directing DKE is being performed. The jackpot expectation suggestion effect DKE is not particularly limited, and may be any effect as long as it suggests a jackpot expectation, such as a battle effect or a story effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIGS. 84 (F) and 84 (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot symbol array "777" shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shows the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 84 (E) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 84 (C) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the timer effect A shown in FIG. 84, when the timer effect execution enable / disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not the timer effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, the ally character CRA wins. As a second effect, a timer effect is performed. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (timer effect ends), suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit as the third effect. The big hit expectation suggestion effect DKE is being performed.

[Timer production B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B.
In the timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution enable / disable effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the symbol inside The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 85A, it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect is executed in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, when the ally character CRA wins, the timer effect is executed, and when the ally character CRA loses, the timer is executed. The production is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85B, the timer effect suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggestion effect, the characters "victory!" Indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 85 (A) are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "victory!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R this time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 85 (A). The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 85C, 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 85 (C) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in place of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at almost the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (E) has been lost. In this example, "958" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement. That is, the lost symbol array "958" shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shows the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 85 (E), as shown in FIG. 85 (G), a character display effect may be executed. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in place of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE of "super heat" is located at almost the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot symbol array "777" shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shows the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above is not always performed, and the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is higher when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85 (G) is performed than when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85 (E) is performed. There is.

That is, in the timer effect B shown in FIG. 85, when the timer effect execution enable / disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not the timer effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, the ally character CRA wins. As a second effect, a timer effect is performed. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (timer effect ends), suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit as the third effect. Character display effect is performed. Then, a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE suggests a jackpot expectation degree. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation changes depending on the content of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer production C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution enable / disable effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the symbol inside The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 86 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect is executed in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, when the ally character CRA wins, the timer effect is executed, and when the ally character CRA loses, the timer is executed. The production is not executed.

When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect in the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 86 (A), the timer display effect is then executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 86 (B). In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B), 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in place of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 86 (D), the character MKE of "chance" is displayed at almost the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Will be done.
Then, although not shown, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) is executed, the lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above. Will be done.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 86 (B), as shown in FIG. 86 (E), a decorative symbol variation effect may be executed. This decorative symbol variation is an effect performed after the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect in the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 86 (A). In this decorative pattern variation effect, only the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, and the timer image TM is not yet displayed. That is, the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 86 (E) is an image in which the battle effect is erased by the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 86 (A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the timer display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer display reach effect is performed when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), or when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped. When a predetermined time has elapsed after stopping in the reach symbol arrangement (before the intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops), the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F), 50 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown. That is, in the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), the display timing of the timer image TM is later than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B) when or after the reach is established due to the fluctuation. Further, the initial value of the timer is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F) is counted down to 0 seconds. .. In this timer stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. It has become. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), the character display effect is executed. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in place of the erased timer image TM. This predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 86 (E), the character MKE of "super heat" is located at almost the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.
Then, although not shown, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is executed, the jackpot confirmation effect is then executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 85 (H) described above. To.
It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) described above is not always performed, and the jackpot confirmation effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is higher when the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (F) is performed than when the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B) is performed. The value is higher when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is performed than when the character display effect shown in D) is performed.

That is, in the timer effect C shown in FIG. 86, when the timer effect execution enable / disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not the timer effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, the ally character CRA wins. As a second effect, a timer effect is performed. Here, in the timer effect, the later the display timing of the timer image TM and the longer the time of the timer initial value of the timer image TM, the higher the expectation of big hit. That is, the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM are effects that suggest the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is determined by the difference between the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM. It's changing. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (timer effect ends), suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit as the third effect. Character display effect is performed. Then, a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE suggests a jackpot expectation degree. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation changes depending on the content of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer production D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed. In this timer effect execution enable / disable effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the symbol inside The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 87 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect is executed in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute the timer effect. As a result of the battle, when the ally character CRA wins, the timer effect is executed, and when the ally character CRA loses, the timer is executed. The production is not executed.

When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect in the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 87 (A), the timer display effect is then executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 87 (B). In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The timer image TM is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87 (B), 10 seconds as the initial value of the timer is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87 (B) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in place of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 87 (D), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at almost the same position as the position where the timer image TM was displayed. Will be done.
Then, although not shown, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) is executed, the lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above. Will be done.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 87 (B), although not shown, when the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 87 (A) is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (E) described above. , The decorative pattern variation effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative pattern variation effect, only the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, and the timer image TM is not yet displayed. That is, the decorative symbol variation effect is an image in which the battle effect is erased by the timer effect execution enable / disable effect shown in FIG. 87 (A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the timer W (double) display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer W display reach effect, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array in the decorative symbol variation effect, or when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. When a predetermined time has elapsed from (before the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped), the timer image TM1 and the timer image TM2 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer images TM1 and TM2 are displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down. In FIG. 87 (E), the timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value, and the timer image TM2 shows 30 seconds as the timer initial value. That is, in the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), the display timings of the timer images TM1 and TM2 are when or after the reach is established due to the fluctuation, and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B). Further, the initial value of the timer is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the timer TM2 stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer TM2 stop effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 87 (E) is counted down to 0 seconds, a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed. There is. At this time, the timer image TM1 is similarly counted down to 20 seconds. In this timer TM2 stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. It has become like. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the timer TM2 character display effect is executed. This timer TM2 character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 stops at 0 seconds. In this timer TM2 character display effect, the timer image TM2 is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in place of the erased timer image TM2. The predetermined character MKE is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 87 (E), the character MKE2 of "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM2 was displayed. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the timer TM1 character display effect is executed. This timer TM1 character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM1 stops at 0 seconds. In this timer TM1 character display effect, the timer image TM1 is erased, and a predetermined character MKE1 is displayed in place of the erased timer image TM1. The predetermined character MKE1 is an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, and in FIG. 87 (H), the character MKE1 "extreme heat" is located at almost the same position as the position where the timer image TM1 is displayed. Is displayed.
Then, although not shown, when the timer TM1 character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (H) is executed, the jackpot confirmation effect is then displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 85 (H) described above. Will be executed.
It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect after the timer TM1 character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) described above is not always performed, and the jackpot confirmation effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is higher when the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 87 (E) is performed than when the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B) is performed. The value is higher when the character display effect shown in FIGS. 87 (G) and 87 (H) is performed than when the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) is performed.

That is, in the timer effect D shown in FIG. 87, when the timer effect execution enable / disable effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not the timer effect is performed, and as a result of the battle effect, the ally character CRA wins. As a second effect, a timer effect is performed. Here, in the timer effect, the later the display timing of the timer image TM, the longer the timer initial value time of the timer image TM, and the larger the number of displayed timer image TMs, the higher the expectation of big hit. .. That is, the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the display number of the timer image TM are effects that suggest the jackpot expectation, and the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the timer image TM. The degree of expectation of a big hit changes depending on the difference in the number of displayed timer image TMs. Then, when the timer value is counted down in the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value stops at a predetermined value, the timer images TM1 and TM2 are sequentially erased (timer effect ends), and a jackpot expectation as the third effect is expected. A character display effect that suggests the degree is performed. Then, the predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 are sequentially displayed in the character display effect, and the contents of the displayed predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation changes depending on the content of the characters displayed in the character display effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, predetermined first effect, second effect, and third effect can be executed, and the first effect is displayed in the first aspect. It is an effect including an effect and an effect displayed in the second aspect. The second effect is a display in which a predetermined timer image is displayed and the timer value is counted using the timer image, and the timer value is set to a predetermined value. It is an effect including a display to stop, and the third effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation degree, and when the effect displayed in the first aspect in the first effect is performed, the second effect is performed. The third effect is performed when the timer value stops at a predetermined value in the second effect. According to this configuration, when the effect displayed in the first aspect in the first effect is performed, the player stops the timer value at a predetermined value in the second effect and the third effect is performed. , You can play the game with great expectations. In addition, since it is determined whether or not to perform an effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree with the timer image whose timer value visually changes with the passage of time, the player can maintain the sense of expectation with the passage of time. In addition, by stopping the timer value at various numerical values, the player can be delighted. Further, it is also possible to associate the stopped timer value with the jackpot expectation and change the jackpot expectation according to the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the first effect is a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character on the player side play against each other, and the first aspect is a battle effect. The effect is that the ally character wins, and the second aspect is the effect that the ally character loses in the battle effect. According to this configuration, a battle effect that determines whether or not to perform the second effect is performed, and when the player's ally character wins in this battle effect, the second effect is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to inform the player of the decision as to whether or not to perform the second effect in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the second effect is an effect of displaying a countdown and stopping the timer value at a predetermined value, and the third effect is an effect in which the timer value is a predetermined value. It is a character effect that displays a predetermined character when stopped at, and the jackpot expectation degree is configured to change depending on the content of the character displayed in the character effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to display characters with various contents in the character production and change the jackpot expectation. As a result, the player can be delighted with the content of the displayed characters and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the display timing of the timer image in the second effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to display the timer image at various timings and change the jackpot expectation. As a result, the player can be happy and depressed depending on the display timing of the timer image, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 87, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the number of displayed timer images. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation by changing the number of timer images in various ways. As a result, the player can be happy and unhappy depending on the number of timer images displayed, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, in the timer display effect, the timer value is displayed by a countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the timer display effect, the timer value may change irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value counts up.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, when the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (0 seconds), the jackpot expectation degree suggestion effect is performed to become a jackpot. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined value at which the timer value stops is associated with the jackpot expectation suggestion effect, and the jackpot expectation suggestion effect also suggests the type of jackpot (for example, the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot or normal jackpot, or jackpot with a different number of rounds). You may do so. With this configuration, not only the jackpot suggestion but also the jackpot type (big hit symbol array) can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine whether or not this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, or the ball is released. It is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit with many.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, two timer images are displayed in the timer display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more timer images may be displayed. Further, the color scheme of the timer image may be different instead of the same color. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation level by the color scheme and number of timer images. Further, the display of the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may be displayed so that the timer values are partially overlapped so as to be visible. Further, the display timings of the two timer images (plurality of timer images) do not have to be simultaneous, and may be displayed with a time difference.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, there are two types of characters indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed in the character display effect, "chance" and "super heat". , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a plurality of types of characters indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot displayed in the character display effect, such as "fever", "NEXT", and "big hit". Also, in this case, the character type is associated with the jackpot type (big hit symbol array), and the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot or normal jackpot, or jackpot with a different number of rounds) is also suggested. May be good. With this configuration, not only the jackpot suggestion but also the jackpot type (big hit symbol array) can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine whether or not this jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, or the ball is released. It is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit with many. Further, the display of the two characters (plurality of characters) of "chance" and "extreme heat" may be displayed so that the characters are partially overlapped so as to be visible. Further, the characters (plurality of characters) may not be displayed at the same time, and the first displayed character may be erased before the next character is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, the effect of determining whether or not to execute the timer effect is. Although the battle production has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect for deciding whether or not to execute the timer effect is a button effect (for example, when the meter is filled up by repeatedly pressing the button, or when a button push is performed to indicate success) or , A production that wins by lottery (for example, a production that wins by roulette), or a production that wins first place in competition (for example, a production that wins in a sprint). However, it is desirable to have a production that can determine victory or defeat, or success or failure).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The first effect is an effect including an effect displayed in the first aspect and an effect displayed in the second aspect.
The second effect is an effect including a display of displaying a predetermined timer image and counting the timer value using the timer image, and a display of stopping the timer value at a predetermined value.
The third effect is an effect including a display suggesting a jackpot expectation.
The display means performs the second effect when the effect displayed in the first aspect is performed in the first effect, and when the timer value stops at a predetermined value in the second effect, the display means said. Perform the third production,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-2]
The first production is a battle production in which a player's ally character and an enemy character play against each other.
The first aspect is an effect in which the ally character wins in the battle effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1, wherein the second aspect is an effect in which the ally character is defeated in the battle effect.
[Aspect B2-3]
The second effect is an effect of displaying a countdown and stopping the timer value at a predetermined value.
The third effect is a character effect that displays a predetermined character when the timer value stops at a predetermined value.
The jackpot expectation level changes depending on the content of the characters displayed in the character effect.
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2.
[Aspect B2-4]
The jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the display timing of the timer image in the second effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3.
[Aspect B2-5]
The jackpot expectation varies depending on the number of displayed timer images.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4.

The timer speed effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. This timer speed effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer speed effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer speed production A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect A. The timer effects of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 88 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" 01 "to" 99 ") are displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88C, the countdown effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "20" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "30" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 is 1 second, but the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Faster than the switching speed (1 second) (eg 0.5 seconds). Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) is switched twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so that the numerical value is switched at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 were "30" and "20" at the time of display, but the difference between the numerical values (count values) decreases. .. Here, the difference between the numerical values (count values) was "10" at the time of display, but the difference is "8". Then, the difference between the numerical values (count values) gradually shrinks, the count values temporarily match as shown in FIG. 88 (E), and then the count values are reversed as shown in FIG. 88 (F). .. After the count value is reversed, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0” first, the first expectation degree is suggested as shown in FIG. 88 (H). The production is done. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 88 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed production B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect B. The timer speed effect B is different from the timer speed effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects of FIGS. 89 (A) to 89 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the first timer image display effect shown in FIG. 89 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the first timer TM1 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 suggests that the remaining period becomes shorter as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and suggests that a certain point has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter runs out (becomes zero). It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the meter is full at the time of display, and then the meter remaining amount starts to decrease (starts).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the second timer TM2 is displayed while the first timer TM1 is displayed. The second timer TM2 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The second timer TM2 is displayed with the meter full at the time of display, and then the meter remaining amount starts to decrease (starts). The decreasing rate of the meter of the second timer TM2 (the rate at which the remaining period changes) is faster than the decreasing rate of the meter of the first timer TM1.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the difference between the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and the meter remaining amount of the second timer TM2 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the remaining amount of the meter temporarily matches, and then, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the remaining amount of the meter is reversed. After the remaining amount of the meter is reversed, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), when the remaining amount of the meter (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the first expectation A suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining meter amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and "heat !!" is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The first expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (I), when the remaining meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 89 (J). .. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining meter amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "super hot!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed production C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect C. .. The timer speed effect C is different from the timer speed effect A in that the speed of the timer changes in the middle. The timer effects of FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the timer image display effect shown in FIG. 90 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" 01 "to" 99 ") are displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the countdown effect is executed. Specifically, both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display "20" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started), respectively. The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 and the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 are the same and are 1 second. Therefore, the same numerical value (count value) is displayed for the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 for a while after being displayed.

After that, the speed-up start effect shown in FIG. 90 (D) is executed. Specifically, a suggestion image C1 suggesting that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 becomes faster is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, an image drawn as "Speed UP" is displayed. Then, the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) is switched twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so that the numerical value is switched at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

As a result, the count values of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are the same for a while after the display (the difference between the count values is "0"), but they are shown in FIGS. 90 (E) and 90 (F). As such, the difference in count values increases. In FIG. 90 (E), the difference in count values is “1”, and in FIG. 90 (F), the difference in count values is “3”. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0" first, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 90 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 90 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed production D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect D. Compared with the timer speed effect A, the timer speed effect D is different in the number of displayed timer images and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects of FIGS. 91 (A) to 91 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the third timer TM3 is displayed in a state where the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. Here, the third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "001" to "999"). ") Is displayed. A certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.
The third timer TM3 is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. The random number display here means that the numerical values between "000" and "999" are displayed randomly (irregularly).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the first timer TM1 is displayed while the third timer TM3 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, and "100" is displayed as the remaining period at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the third timer TM3 is faster than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1 (1 second).

Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, the second timer TM2 is displayed while the third timer TM3 and the first timer TM1 are displayed. The second timer TM2 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, and a remaining period longer than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 is displaying "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "100", and the countdown is started (started).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the countdown of the third timer TM3 is started (started). When the third timer TM3 is started, the remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays "70" and the remaining period of the second timer IM2 displays "68", the third timer TM3 remains after displaying the random number. "10" is displayed as the period of, and then the countdown is started. At the start of the countdown, the third timer TM3 slows down the numerical value switching speed. As a result, the player can recognize that the countdown has started. Further, before and after the countdown of the third timer TM3 starts, the speed-up start effect of the second timer TM2 is executed. Specifically, a suggestion image (not shown) suggesting that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 becomes faster is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, the numerical value (digital display) is switched twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), so that the numerical value is switched at twice the speed of the first timer TM1. The numerical value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero “0”, the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (F). In the third expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, as in the third expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first position where the second timer TM2 is displayed is "heat !!" The expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the content of the first expectation suggestion image EI1 is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 91 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first and third expectation degree suggestion effects, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation suggestion image EI3.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer speed effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is displayed in the state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the speed at which is changed and the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes are different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88, 90, and 91, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by the countdown of the digital display, and the first timer TM1 In the production, the speed of each countdown is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 each indicate the remaining period by changing so as to shorten the length of a specific image. Therefore, in the first effect, the speed at which the length of each specific image is shortened is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, the remaining timer TM1 indicates the remaining timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 in a state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed before the first effect. It is possible to execute the second effect in which the speed at which the period changes and the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes are the same. According to this configuration, since the speed at which the remaining period changes changes from the middle, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes changes with the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. Faster than the speed, before the first effect, with the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 displayed, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is larger than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. After the short second effect and the first effect, the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is exhausted, and the second timer TM2 is displayed. A third effect in which a predetermined image is displayed at the position can be executed. According to this configuration, since the remaining period is reversed, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. Is faster than the speed at which is changed, and before the first effect, the first timer TM1 is displayed, and the second timer TM2 is newly displayed from the state in which the second timer TM2 is not displayed. After the first effect, the first timer TM1 is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is exhausted, and the second timer TM2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute the production of 3. According to this configuration, since the timer displayed later becomes zero first, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer speed effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be at least temporarily different from the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. For example, the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily slower than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1, or the switching speed may change and the switching speed may be temporarily slowed down. However, it may be faster or slower than the first timer TM1. In the above (for example, FIG. 89), the decreasing rate of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be different from the decreasing rate of the meter of the first timer TM1 at least temporarily. For example, the decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be temporarily slower than the decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1, or the decreasing speed may change so that the decreasing speed temporarily becomes the first. It may be faster or slower than the timer TM1.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may move during the countdown. In addition, they may move and partially overlap each other. Further, at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may disappear from the display screen 7a during the countdown.
[Modification 3]
In the above timer speed effect, it is assumed that the timer effect is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point in time is reached.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point in time is reached.
The speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes and the remaining period indicated by the second timer while the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it can perform a first effect that differs from the speed at which it changes.
◇ [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
The first timer and the second timer indicate the remaining period by a countdown on a digital display.
In the first production, the game machine is characterized in that the speed of each countdown is different.
◇ [Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
The first timer and the second timer indicate the remaining period by changing the length of a specific image so as to be shortened, respectively.
The first effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the speed at which the length of each of the specific images is shortened is different.
◇ [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3.
Prior to the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes while the first timer and the second timer are displayed, and the second timer. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a second effect in which the speed at which the remaining period changes is the same.
◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3.
In the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes.
Prior to the first effect, in a state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed, the remaining period indicated by the second timer is larger than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. With a short second production,
After the first effect, in a state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and the position where the first timer is displayed is reached. , A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a third effect in which a predetermined image is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3.
In the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes.
Prior to the first effect, the second timer is displayed, and the second effect in which the first timer is newly displayed from the state in which the first timer is not displayed, and the second effect.
After the first effect, in a state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and the first timer is displayed on the display means. A game machine characterized by being able to perform the third effect that disappears.

The timer count effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. This timer count effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer count effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer count production A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A. The timer effects of FIGS. 92 (A) to 92 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" The number of seconds from "01" to "99") is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display / countdown effect shown in FIGS. 92 (B) and 92 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "2" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. The random number display here means that the numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed of the numerical value of the second timer TM2 (1 second).

On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92 (A) to 92 (D), the area of the interlocking image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocking image RM disappears, the digital display portion (numerical portion). ), The next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is in a state of covering the entire inside of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (the area is restored). In this way, the shape of the interlocking image RM changes constantly (the area decreases) from the display of one count during the countdown to the switching to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1 second). Every time) a certain change (decrease in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown.

After the random number display / countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 92 (D). When the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (when it starts), the interlocking image RM is displayed by superimposing it on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, in the first timer TM1, "5" is displayed as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. By displaying the interlocking image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (after the start), for a while, each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down as shown in FIGS. 92 (E) to 92 (H). Execute (double countdown production). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes according to the switching of the respective counts. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 92 (J). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", and the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Timer count production B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B. Compared with the timer count effect A, the timer count effect B is different in the operation mode of the interlocking image RM and the mode until the timer is started. The timer effects of FIGS. 93 (A) to 93 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" The number of seconds from "01" to "99") is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the 88 display / countdown effect shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 93 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "2" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started), "88" is displayed, and the timer is stopped in that state. On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A) to 93 (D), the area of the interlocking image RM increases with the passage of time, and the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image. , The next count is displayed in the digital display part (number part). When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the shape of the interlocking image RM changes constantly (the area increases) from the display of one count during the countdown to the switching to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1 second). A constant change (increase in area) is repeated (for each). The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown.

After the random number display / countdown effect is executed for a while, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started) as shown in FIG. 93 (D). When the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (when it starts), the interlocking image RM is displayed by superimposing it on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, in the first timer TM1, "5" is displayed as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. By displaying the interlocking image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (after the start), for a while, each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down as shown in FIGS. 93 (E) to 93 (H). Execute (double countdown production). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes according to the switching of the respective counts. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 93 (J). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", and the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Timer count production C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C. Compared with the timer count effect A, the timer count effect C is different in the operation mode of the interlocking image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable accessory. The timer effects of FIGS. 94 (A) to 94 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" The number of seconds from "01" to "99") is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the countdown effect shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to 94 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "10" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "2" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). The interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) on the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started (started) the countdown, respectively. The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numerical portion). On the other hand, the interlocking image RM of the first timer TM1 and the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 have different switching timings (cycles). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to 94 (E), in the linked image RM of the first timer TM1, the image area of the linked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image at the time of display, and the area is covered with the countdown. When the number decreases and the count becomes zero, the area of the linked image RM also disappears. That is, the interlocking image RM of the first timer TM1 represents the remaining period until the count becomes zero. Even in this case, it can be said that the interlocking image RM is interlocked with the count because the area is constantly reduced with the count. On the other hand, the area of the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 increases with the passage of time as in the timer count effect B, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number). In (part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). The interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape (area increases) from the time when one count during the countdown is displayed until it switches to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1). A constant change (increase in area) is repeated (every second).

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the movable accessory drive effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stands still at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. At this time, the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, by changing the visible portion of the interlocking image RM, the player can recognize that the timer countdown is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 94 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 94 (J), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the second Expectation suggestion production is performed. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second timer TM1 is drawn as "super hot!" At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image is displayed with a higher expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Timer count production D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D. Compared with the timer count effect A, the timer count effect D is different in the operation mode of the interlocking image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable accessory. The timer effects of FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the first timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "1" to "999"). The number of seconds) is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "100" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). The interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) on the first timer TM1 that has started (started) the countdown. The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically inside the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as in the timer count effect A, the area of the interlocking image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocking image RM disappears, the next count is displayed in the digital display portion (number portion). Will be done. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is in a state of covering the entire inside of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (the area is restored). In this way, the shape of the interlocking image RM changes constantly (the area decreases) from the display of one count during the countdown to the switching to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1 second). Every time) a certain change (decrease in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is newly displayed while the first timer TM1 is executing the countdown during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the second timer TM2 is a timer image in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "01" to "99"). The number of seconds) is displayed. As described above, the certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when the certain time point is reached.

Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "2" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numerical portion). Similar to the timer count effect B, the area of the interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 increases with the passage of time, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number portion). In, the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). The interlocking image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape (area increases) from the time when one count during the countdown is displayed until it switches to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1). A constant change (increase in area) is repeated (every second). The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown.

Next, the third timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (E) is executed. Specifically, the third timer TM3 is newly displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are executing the countdown. Here, the third timer TM3 is not superimposed on the interlocking image RM and is displayed at a position close to the interlocking image RM. The third timer TM3 is a two-digit digital display, and displays the remaining period (here, the number of seconds from "01" to "99") until a certain point is reached by a countdown. The interlocking image RM is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside the rectangular image. The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically inside a rectangular image that does not surround the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, the area of the interlocking image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocking image RM disappears, the next count is displayed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is again in a state of covering the entire inside of the rectangular image (the area is restored). In this way, the shape of the interlocking image RM changes constantly (the area decreases) from the display of one count during the countdown to the switching to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1 second). Every time) a certain change (decrease in area) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown.

As shown in FIG. 95 (F), the movable accessory drive effect may be executed during the countdown effect by the three timers. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stands still at the advanced position. By this. A part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. At this time, the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, by changing the visible portion of the interlocking image RM, the player can recognize that the timer countdown is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 95 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (I), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 95 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the second timer TM3 is drawn with "heat !!" at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. Expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation suggestion image EI2 is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the first timer TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is superimposed on the first timer TM1 to count down the first timer TM1. The linked image RM can be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the interlocking image RM has a shape in a predetermined mode between the time when one count during the countdown is displayed and the time when the countdown is switched to the next count. It changes, and every time the count is switched, the shape change according to a predetermined mode is repeated. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the area of the interlocking image RM changes with the passage of time during one count. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the first effect in which the first timer TM1 that has not been started is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the first effect. It is possible to execute the second effect in which the 1-timer TM1 starts the countdown. In the first effect, the interlocking image RM is not displayed, and in the second effect, the interlocking image RM is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 displays a random number on a digital display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, and the first timer TM1 is not started. The second timer TM2 is started, and the interlocking image RM linked to the countdown of the second timer TM2 is displayed superimposing on the second timer TM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer count effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95 (J)), it is assumed that the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 displays the content having a higher expectation degree of the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. However, the second expectation suggestion image EI2 may display the content having a lower expectation of the jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1, or may display the content having the same expectation.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 becomes "0", the expectation degree suggestion images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expected degree suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an image of the operation unit may be displayed, or an image in which the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 93 (D)), the first timer TM1 displays a period longer than the remaining period displayed by the second timer TM2 at the time of starting, but the second timer TM2 displays it. A period longer than the remaining period may be displayed.
[Modification example 4]
In the above timer speed effect, it is assumed that the timer effect is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a state where the first timer is displayed on the display means, an interlocking image linked to the countdown of the first timer can be displayed by superimposing on the first timer.
◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1.
The shape of the interlocking image changes in a predetermined mode from the display of one count in the countdown to the switching to the next count, and the shape change according to the predetermined mode is repeated each time the count is switched. A game machine characterized by being able to play.
◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-2.
The interlocking image is a gaming machine characterized in that the area of the linked image changes with the passage of time during the one count.
◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3.
The display means executes a first effect in which the first timer that has not been started is displayed, and a second effect in which the first timer starts a countdown after the first effect. It is possible and
A gaming machine characterized in that the interlocking image is not displayed in the first effect, and the interlocking image is displayed in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4.
In the first effect, the first timer is a gaming machine characterized in that a random number is displayed on a digital display.
◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4 or aspect B4-5.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown.
In the first effect, the first timer and the second timer are displayed, the second timer is started in a state where the first timer is not started, and the second timer is started. A gaming machine characterized in that an interlocking image linked to the countdown of the second timer is displayed superimposed on the second timer.

The movable accessory timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. This movable accessory timer effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable accessory timer effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is output from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Movable accessory timer production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect A. The timer effects of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" The number of seconds from "01" to "99") is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "22" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. The random number display here means that the numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed of the numerical value of the second timer TM2 (1 second).

On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B of FIG. 93, the area of the interlocking image RM increases with the passage of time, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion. In (number part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the shape of the interlocking image RM changes constantly (the area increases) from the display of one count during the countdown to the switching to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1 second). A constant change (increase in area) is repeated (for each). The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown.

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and a random number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stands still at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 to be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and a random number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (backward) downward from the advanced position, it stands still at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and a random number is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (when it starts), the interlocking image RM is displayed by superimposing it on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, in the first timer TM1, "5" is displayed as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays the remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. By displaying the interlocking image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (after the start), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes the countdown for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes according to the switching of the respective counts. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 96 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 96 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. A timer suggestion image is displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Movable accessory timer production B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect B. The movable accessory timer effect B is different from the movable accessory timer effect A in that the first timer TM1 is started from the time of display. The timer effects of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97A, a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" The number of seconds from "01" to "99") is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the double countdown effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 displays "17" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "23" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started).

The interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) on the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started (started) the countdown, respectively. The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B of FIG. 93, the area of the interlocking image RM increases with the passage of time, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion. In (number part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the shape of the interlocking image RM changes constantly (the area increases) from the display of one count during the countdown to the switching to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1 second). A constant change (increase in area) is repeated (for each). The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown.

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down. Therefore, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes according to the switching of each count.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stands still at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 to be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (backward) downward from the advanced position, it stands still at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to count down. Therefore, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes according to the switching of each count.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue the countdown again in a state where the whole can be visually recognized (double countdown effect). The interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2. After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 97 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 97 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. A timer suggestion image is displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Movable accessory timer production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect C. The number of displayed timers of the movable accessory timer effect C is different from that of the movable accessory timer effect A. The timer effects of FIGS. 98 (A) to 98 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside a circular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, "" The number of seconds from "01" to "99") is displayed. It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

Next, the random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (B) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 displays "22" at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (countdown is not started), and a random number is displayed. The random number display here means that the numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed of the numerical value of the second timer TM2 (1 second). Further, the third timer TM3 is displayed during the random number display / countdown effect. The third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a three-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until a certain point is reached by the countdown (here, seconds of "001" to "999"). Number) is displayed. When the third timer TM3 is displayed, "100" is displayed as the remaining period, and then the countdown is started (started).

On the second timer TM2 that has started (started) the countdown, the interlocking image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocking image RM here is an image (region image) showing a region represented by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion). The area of this interlocking image RM changes periodically in a manner like a radar image or a pie chart inside a circular image surrounding a digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, as shown in the timer count effect B of FIG. 93, the area of the interlocking image RM increases with the passage of time, and when the image area of the interlocking image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion. In (number part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocking image RM is not displayed inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) again (starting from zero again). In this way, the shape of the interlocking image RM changes constantly (the area increases) from the display of one count during the countdown to the switching to the next count, and each time the count is switched (1 second). A constant change (increase in area) is repeated (for each). The change in the shape of the interlocking image RM can strongly impress the player with the countdown. The interlocking image RM is not displayed on the third timer TM3 that has started (started) the countdown. As a result, it is possible to give different characteristics to each timer, and it is possible to improve the interest.

During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the movable accessory advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the third timer TM3 and the second timer TM2 are covered by the first movable accessory 14 in order from the lower side, making it difficult to see. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and a random number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stands still at the advanced position. As a result, the entire third timer TM3 and almost the entire second timer TM2 are covered by the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 to be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and a random number is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (backward) downward from the advanced position, it stands still at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3, which are almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14, become visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet, and a random number is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (when it starts), the interlocking image RM is displayed by superimposing it on the digital display portion (number portion). Here, in the first timer TM1, "5" is displayed as the remaining period after the random number is displayed. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays the remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3. By displaying the interlocking image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

After the first timer TM1 starts the countdown (after the start), each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3 executes the countdown for a while (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocking image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3, and the area changes according to the switching of each count. After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 98 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 is displayed. The timer suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 98 (J). In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation that "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. A timer suggestion image is displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1. After that, the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", and the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the third expectation degree suggestion effect, as in the first and second expectation degree suggestion effects, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third timer TM3 is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 is displayed. An expectation suggestion image is displayed.

[Movable accessory timer production D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory timer effect D. The movable accessory timer effect D is different from the movable accessory timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects of FIGS. 99 (A) to 99 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable accessory timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 99A, a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is displayed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. Here, the second timer TM2 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The second timer TM2 suggests that the remaining period becomes shorter as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and suggests that a certain point has been reached when the remaining amount of the meter runs out (becomes zero). It should be noted that a certain time point is an arbitrary time point, and it is not always necessary for some display change to occur when a certain time point is reached. Here, a certain time point means a time point when the expectation degree suggestion image described later is displayed. A certain time point may be a time when the operation acceptance period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or a time when the operation acceptance period ends. Further, it may be the time when the operation unit image showing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. The second timer TM2 is displayed with the meter full at the time of display, and then the meter remaining amount starts to decrease (starts).

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, the first timer TM1 is displayed while the second timer TM2 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a certain point. The first timer TM1 is displayed in a state where the meter is full at the time of display, and then the meter remaining amount starts to decrease (starts). The decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) is the same as the decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2. The decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) may be faster than that of the meter of the second timer TM2.

As shown in FIG. 99 (C), the movable accessory advancement effect is executed while the remaining meters of both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are decreasing. Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. As a result, a part of the display screen 7a is covered with the first movable accessory 14. While the first movable accessory 14 is moving, the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the remaining amount of the meter continues to decrease.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the movable accessory stationary effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stands still at the advanced position. As a result, almost the entire second timer TM2 is covered with the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see. The second timer TM2 may be covered with the first movable accessory 14 to be completely invisible, or may be partially visible. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the remaining amount of the meter continues to decrease.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), the movable accessory retreat effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable accessory 14 moves (backward) downward from the advanced position, it stands still at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable accessory 14, becomes visible again. In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, the remaining amount of the meter continues to decrease.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99F, the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continues to decrease while the whole is visible again (double meter remaining amount reduction effect). After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), when the remaining meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. 99 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is produced. It is carried out. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability of becoming a big hit (expectation degree) in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining meter amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears and "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The first expected degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), when the remaining meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. 99 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is produced. It is carried out. In the second expectation degree suggestion effect, similarly to the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image suggesting the probability (expectation degree) of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect is displayed. Here, when the remaining meter amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears and "chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The second expectation suggestion image is displayed. The second expectation suggestion image EM1 may display contents having a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first expectation suggestion image EI1.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the movable accessory timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, after the first effect in which the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect. , The second effect that at least a part of the second timer TM2 becomes difficult to see due to the advancement of the first movable accessory 14 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the second timer TM2 is started while the first timer TM1 is not started, and the second timer TM2 is started. In the production, the first timer TM1 has not started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by the countdown of the digital display, and in the first production, the remaining period is shown. The first timer TM1 is not started, a random number is displayed on the digital display, the second timer TM2 is performing a countdown, and in the second production, the first timer TM1 is not started. Random numbers are displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the second effect, the first movable accessory 14 retracts and the second timer TM2 becomes visible as a third effect. ,
After the third effect, the first timer TM1 is started, and the fourth effect, in which the first timer TM1 displays the remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2, is executed. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the fourth effect, the second timer TM2 displays the remaining period, and the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. When the period is exhausted, the fifth effect in which the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed can be executed at the position where the first timer TM1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the interlocking image RM linked to the countdown of the two timer TM2 can be displayed by superimposing the two timer TM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the movable accessory timer effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above-mentioned stationary effect of the movable accessory (for example, FIG. 96 (D)), the second timer TM2 may be completely invisible by the first movable accessory 14. Further, the second timer TM2 may be configured to be in a plurality of difficult states by moving the first movable accessory 14 a plurality of times in the vertical direction. Further, the first movable accessory 14 may be configured to make not only the second timer TM2 but also at least a part of the first timer TM1 difficult to see.
[Modification 2]
In the above-mentioned timer effect, the first movable accessory 14 is configured so that at least a part of the second timer TM2 is difficult to see. However, for example, at least a part of the second timer TM2 may be obscured by an accessory other than the first movable accessory 14, such as the second movable accessory 15.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 96 and 98, the first timer TM1 is displayed as a random number until the countdown is started after the display. However, after the display, the first timer TM1 may display a display other than the random number display until the countdown is started. For example, the first timer TM1 may be stopped at 88 display until the countdown is started after the display.
[Modification example 4]
It is assumed that the above timer effect is executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the above timer speed effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine equipped with a movable accessory that can advance to the entire surface of the display means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point in time is reached.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer that indicates the remaining period until a certain point in time is reached.
A first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, and
A gaming machine characterized in that after the first effect, it is possible to perform a second effect in which at least a part of the second timer becomes difficult to see due to the advancement of the movable accessory.
◇ [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1.
In the first effect, the second timer is started while the first timer is not started.
A game machine characterized in that the first timer is not started in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2.
The first timer and the second timer indicate the remaining period by a countdown on a digital display.
In the first effect, the first timer is not started, a random number is displayed on the digital display, and the second timer is counting down.
In the second effect, the first timer is not started, and the random number is displayed.
◇ [Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3.
After the second effect, the movable accessory retracts and the second timer becomes visible.
After the third effect, the first timer is started, and the first timer displays the remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer. A game machine characterized by being able to execute.
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4.
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
After the fourth effect, in a state where the second timer is displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and the position where the first timer is displayed is reached. , A gaming machine characterized in that a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-3 to B5-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, an interlocking image linked to the countdown of the second timer can be displayed by superimposing on the second timer.

The icon selection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. This icon selection effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the icon selection effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect A.
In this icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In each icon of the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it means that the jackpot expectation is very low, if there are two star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future, and more specifically, it suggests the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks and the jackpot expectation is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62C appears. Since the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C have different characters in the icon image, the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which the character representing "NEXT" is represented. The characters "NEXT" indicate that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a square shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. In FIG. 100 (C), it is shown that the second icon B63 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In this icon number change effect, the icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and the re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect is performed again next, and the character "NEXT" is represented. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons is reduced in the icon selection effect to be performed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the number of the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared with the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. In FIG. 100 (G), it is shown that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into a reach effect in which the characters included in the icon B62B appear. This reach effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is medium because the icon B62B contains three star marks.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect B.
In this icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In each icon of the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it means that the jackpot expectation is very low, if there are two star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future, and more specifically, it suggests the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks and the jackpot expectation is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62C appears. Since the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C have different characters in the icon image, the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which the character representing "NEXT" is represented. The characters "NEXT" indicate that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a square shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101 (C) shows that the second icon B63 has been selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In this icon number change effect, the icon number increase suggestion image B66 and the re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect is performed again next, and the character "NEXT" is represented. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. The icon number increase suggestion image B66 suggests that the number of icons increases in the icon selection effect to be performed again next time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is increased by one as compared with the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62D is newly displayed. This icon B62D has five star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is very high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62D appears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C, icon B62D) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101 (G) shows that the icon B62D of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62D is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into a reach effect in which the characters included in the icon B62D appear. This reach effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is very high because there are five star marks included in the icon B62D.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect C.
In this icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In each icon of the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it means that the jackpot expectation is very low, if there are two star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future, and more specifically, it suggests the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks and the jackpot expectation is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62C appears. Since the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C have different characters in the icon image, the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the square-shaped second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image representing a character representing "NEXT" and a star mark. The characters "NEXT" indicate that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. In addition, this star mark indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it means that the jackpot expectation is very low, if there are two star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three star marks, the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 102 (B) has three star marks, suggesting that the jackpot expectation is medium.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102 (C) shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this suggests that a production with a medium jackpot expectation will be performed in the future.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In this icon number change effect, the icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and the re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect is performed again next, and the character "NEXT" is represented. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons is reduced in the icon selection effect to be performed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the number of the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared with the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of the star marks is three as in the icon selection effect 1 of FIG. 102 (C), suggesting that the jackpot expectation is medium.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102 (G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into a reach effect in which the characters included in the icon B62B appear. The number of star marks (3) included in the icon B62B suggests that the jackpot expectation of this reach effect is moderate.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect D.
In this icon selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, the button image B61 is displayed. In each icon of the first icon B62, a star mark and a character image are associated with each other. This star mark indicates the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it means that the jackpot expectation is very low, if there are two star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect that will be developed in the future, and more specifically, it suggests the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62A appears. Further, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three star marks and the jackpot expectation is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C has two star marks, indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character shown by the icon B62C appears. Since the icon B62A, the icon B62B, and the icon B62C have different characters in the icon image, the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. Each of the first icons B62 has a circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the square-shaped second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image representing a character representing "NEXT" and a star mark. The characters "NEXT" indicate that when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. In addition, this star mark indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it means that the jackpot expectation is very low, if there are two star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three star marks, the jackpot expectation is medium. When there are four star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and when there are five star marks, it means that the jackpot expectation is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 103 (B) has two star marks, suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the icon selection effect 1 is executed. In this icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B, icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icons are hatched). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103 (C) shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this suggests that a production with a medium or higher jackpot expectation will be performed in the future.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In this icon number change effect, the icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and the re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image suggesting that the icon selection effect is performed again next, and the character "NEXT" is represented. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change effect is a pseudo-continuous effect. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons is reduced in the icon selection effect to be performed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display performance 2, the button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the number of the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared with the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, the second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of these star marks has increased by one to three as compared with the icon selection effect 1 in FIG. 103 (C), suggesting that the jackpot expectation is medium.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), the icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (icon B62A, icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in this icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to prompt the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are selected in order (the selected icon is indicated by hatching). One icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103 (G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into a reach effect in which the characters included in the icon B62B appear. This reach effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is medium because the icon B62B contains three star marks.
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the icon selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the icon selection effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display of the first icon B62 and the display of the second icon B63 are performed, and one icon is selected from the first icon B62 and the second icon B63. When the icon selection effect 1 to be selected is performed and the second icon B63 is selected, the first icon B62 is displayed and the second icon B63 is displayed, and the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. According to this configuration, when the second icon B63 different from the first icon B62 in which the jackpot expectation degree and the character are associated with each other is selected in the icon selection effect 1, the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot while continuing the expectation of the player for the jackpot, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is smaller than the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1. According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of the first icons B62 is smaller than the number of the icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1. Therefore, in the icon selection effect 2, the player himself / herself It is possible to make the first icon B62 to be selected easier to be selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the icon selection effect 2. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is one less than the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1. .. According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of the first icons B62 is one less than the number of the icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1, so that the player selects in the icon selection effect 2. While suppressing the exclusion of the first icon B62 that desires to be selected, it is possible to make the player feel that the first icon B62 that he / she desires to select is easily selected, and the interest of the icon selection effect 2 is improved. Can be made to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon selection effects A, C, and D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lowest jackpot expectation of the jackpot expectation suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect. It is higher than the lowest jackpot expectation of the jackpot expectation suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in 1. According to this configuration, it is more likely that the jackpot expectation is higher when the icon is selected in the icon selection effect 2 than in the icon selection effect 1. Therefore, when the transition to the icon selection effect 2, the player is greatly affected. A feeling of expectation can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the icon selection effects A and B of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second icon B63 in the icon selection effect 1 and the icon selection effect 2 does not include the suggestion of the jackpot expectation (star mark). According to this configuration, when the second icon B63 is selected, the next development is unknown, so that the player can be excited. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the icon selection effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the icon selection effect A of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the icon selection effect 2, two or more icons may be reduced as compared with the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effect B, in the icon selection effect 2, two or more icons may be added as compared with the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, there may be a plurality of second icons B63.

[Modification 2]
In the icon selection effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may have the same icon shape. For example, both the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may have a circular shape. Further, the first icon B62 may have a different shape for each icon.

[Modification 3]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, the icon with the most star marks among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1 (high hit expectation). An icon with more star marks (an icon with a high expectation of a big hit) may appear rather than an icon).
Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the star with the fewest star marks (the icon with the lowest jackpot expectation) is a star. An icon with many marks (an icon with a high expectation of big hit) may appear.

[Modification example 4]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, the icon with the fewest star marks among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1 (the jackpot expectation is low). An icon with the same number of star marks (icon) and an icon with a high expectation for a big hit may appear. Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, among the first icons B62 in the first icon display effect 1, the star with the fewest star marks (the icon with the lowest jackpot expectation) is a star. An icon with a small number of marks (an icon with a high expectation for a big hit) may appear.

[Modification 5]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, each icon of the second icon B63 of the first icon display effect 2 has the same character as each icon of the first icon B62 in the first icon display effect 1. It may be used as it is, or the number of star marks may be increased or decreased.

[Modification 6]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the highest jackpot expectation of the jackpot expectation suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect 1. The jackpot expectation suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62 may be higher than the highest jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, when an icon is selected in the icon selection effect 2 rather than the icon selection effect 1, an icon with an extremely high expectation of a big hit can be selected. Therefore, when the transition to the icon selection effect 2, the game It is possible to give a person a great sense of expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 are not star marks, but numbers (for example, percentages), colors, patterns, icon sizes, and icons. The darkness, the position of the icon, etc. may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

[Modification 8]
When the second icon B63 is selected in the icon selection effect 1 in the icon selection effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the star associated with the second icon B63 in the next icon selection effect 2 The number of marks may be configured to be equal to or greater than the number of star marks of the second icon B63 selected in the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effect 2, the first icon B62 having a star mark smaller than the number of star marks of the second icon B63 may not be displayed. That is, the larger the number of icon selection effects, the higher the expectation of a big hit may be.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of icons including a character display that suggests the development destination of the reach effect by a character, a jackpot expectation suggestion display that suggests a jackpot expectation, and a first display that includes. Yes,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second display that displays an icon different from the icon in the first display.
In the third display effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and one icon is selected from the first display icon and the second display icon. It is an effect that performs the first selection effect to be selected.
The fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect, and when the icon of the second display is selected in the first selection effect of the third display effect, the first display effect is performed. In the effect of performing the display effect of the above and the second display effect, and performing the second selection effect of selecting one icon from the icon of the first display and the icon of the second display. is there,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application B6-2]
The gaming machine according to the application example B6-1.
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is smaller than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application B6-3]
The gaming machine according to the application example B6-1 or the application example B6-2.
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is one less than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example B6-1 to Application Example B6-3.
The lowest jackpot expectation of the jackpot expectation suggestion display included in the icon of the first display in the second selection effect is the jackpot included in the icon of the first display in the first selection effect. Higher than the lowest jackpot expectation of the expectation suggestion display,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Application B6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example B6-1 to Application Example B6-4.
The icon of the second display in the first selection effect does not include the jackpot expectation suggestion display.
A game machine characterized by that.

The effect during fluctuation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. This changing effect can be performed in relation to the variation display of the decorative symbol that is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). For example, it can be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like.

[Fluctuating production A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during fluctuation.
In the changing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and the display screen 7a is still switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character (logo) image TLG1 of "G" is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The "G" logo image TLG1 is entirely colored blue and is displayed in a mode in which the transparency of the logo is small (there is almost no transparency). That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the degree of transparency and the color of the "G" logo image TLG1 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. The degree becomes smaller (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the "G" logo image TLG1 shown in FIG. 104 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A). It shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R seem to have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) is lost (reach loss) after reaching the reach in FIG. 104 (C). .. In this example, "858" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 104 (B), the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) may be executed. This transparent logo effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and the display screen 7a is still switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character (logo) image TLG2 "G" is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In this "G" logo image TLG2, the outline of the logo is bordered in dark red, and the entire color is arranged in light red. As a result, the "G" logo image TLG2 is displayed in a mode in which the transparency of the logo is large (the background behind it is almost visible). That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E), the degree of transparency and the color of the "G" logo image TLG1 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the degree of transparency is large and the color is expected to be a big hit. The degree increases (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the "G" logo image TLG2 shown in FIG. 104 (E) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A). It shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R seem to have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) was a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 104 (F). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) is a case where the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) (the effect in which the red logo has a high transparency and the jackpot expectation is high) is performed. However, it is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the loss pattern stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) described above is when the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) (the blue logo has a low transparency and the jackpot expectation is low). Even so, it is not always performed, and the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the changing effect A shown in FIG. 104, a transparent logo effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing can be executed, and a jackpot expectation is expected depending on the type of the transparent logo effect. The degree is changing. That is, in the logo image (character image) displayed by the transparent logo effect, when the transparency of the logo is small, the jackpot expectation is low, and when the transparency of the logo is high, the jackpot expectation is high. Further, in the logo image (character image), when the logo is blue, the jackpot expectation is low, and when the logo is red, the jackpot expectation is high. In other words, when the fluctuation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a big hit, a plurality of logos having different transparency as a big hit suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.) during the fluctuation. A predetermined transparent logo production is performed from various types of transparent logo production.

[Fluctuating production B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the effect B during fluctuation.
In the changing effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), and the display screen 7a is still switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character (logo) image TLG3 "G" is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The "G" logo image TLG3 is entirely colored green and is displayed in a mode in which the transparency of the logo is medium (semi-transparent, the background behind is visible by about 50%). That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), the degree of transparency and the color of the "G" logo image TLG3 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the degree of transparency is medium and the color is green. The jackpot expectation is medium (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the "G" logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again to display the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A). It shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R seem to have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) is lost (reach loss) after reaching the reach in FIG. 105 (C). .. In this example, "858" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 105 (B), the logo accessory movable effect shown in FIG. 105 (E) may be executed. In this logo accessory movable effect, during the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), the logo accessory LYA descends from the home position and stops at substantially the center of the front side of the display screen 7a for a predetermined time. ing. The logo accessory LYA has the same "G" logo body as the "G" logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B) at the tip portion, and in this logo accessory movable production, the "G" logo body is used. The whole is visible and stopped at approximately the center of the front side of the display screen 7a. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased, and instead, the display effect is performed as if the periphery of the "G" logo body is shining. This enhances the effect. The logo accessory LYA as a movable accessory shown in this figure is provided as a part of the above-mentioned board movable accessory 15 (see FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the transparent logo effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this transparent logo production, the logo character LYA rises to the extent that the "G" logo body, which has stopped at the center of the front side of the display screen 7a, is hidden by about half as shown in FIG. 105 (F), and this "G" The letter "G" (logo) image TLG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a directly below the logo body. The "G" logo image TLG3 is entirely colored green and is displayed in a mode in which the transparency of the logo is medium (semi-transparent, the background behind is visible by about 50%). Further, the "G" logo image TLG3 is displayed in the same size as the "G" logo body. This enhances the effect. That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), the "G" logo image TLG3 is displayed in relation to the movement of the logo accessory LYA. Although the display itself of this "G" logo image TLG3 is the same as that shown in FIG. 105 (B), the jackpot expectation is as shown in FIG. 105 (F) because it is displayed in relation to the movement of the logo accessory LYA. ) Is higher than the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (F) is displayed for a predetermined period, the logo accessory LYA rises and returns to the home position, and the display screen 7a is switched again to FIG. 104 ( The decorative symbol variation effect shown in A) is displayed, indicating that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) was a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 105 (G). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) is a case where the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (F) (transparent logo effect performed in connection with the movement of the logo accessory LYA) is performed. However, it is not always performed, and there may be a case where the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) is performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the loss pattern stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) described above is performed by the transparent logo effect (transparent logo effect not related to the movement of the logo accessory LYA) shown in FIG. 105 (B). Even in such a case, it is not always performed, and the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the changing effect B shown in FIG. 105, a transparent logo effect that suggests a jackpot expectation while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing can be executed, and this transparent logo effect is a movable accessory. The degree of expectation of a big hit changes depending on whether or not it is involved in movement. That is, when the logo image (character image) displayed by the transparent logo effect is displayed in relation to the movement of the movable accessory, the jackpot expectation is high, and when it is displayed regardless of the movement of the movable accessory. The jackpot expectation is low. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a big hit, the probability that the logo image is displayed related to the movement of the movable accessory is higher regardless of the movement of the movable accessory. It is higher than the probability displayed in.

[Fluctuating production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the effect C during fluctuation.
In the changing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 106 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the effect stage is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a, and is the first stage as the background image HG1 with the motif of "mountain". (Stay stage) is displayed. As the production stage, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a production stage selected from a plurality of production stages having different background images is displayed (for example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol changes. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times, when a predetermined time elapses, when the game state changes, when the player performs a production stage selection operation, etc.).

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach symbol stop effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (A), and shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the reach effect dedicated to the first stage is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach production dedicated to the first stage is a dedicated reach production corresponding to the first stage, which is performed only when the first stage is staying. In the reach effect dedicated to the first stage, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the character CRA1 dedicated to the first stage appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to produce. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 106 (A) was a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 106 (D) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot will be lost with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 106 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (E) may be executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 106 (E) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this decorative pattern variation effect, the effect stage is displayed on the display screen 7a behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is the second stage as the background image HG2 with the motif of "tree". (Stay stage) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach symbol stop effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (E), and shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the reach effect dedicated to the second stage is executed on the display screen 7a. This second stage dedicated reach production is a dedicated reach production corresponding to the second stage, which is performed only when the second stage is staying. In the reach effect dedicated to the second stage, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the character CRA2 dedicated to the second stage appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to produce. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 106 (E) was a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 106 (F). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 106 (H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot will be lost with a predetermined probability. However, there is a difference in the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) between the first stage-only reach effect shown in FIG. 106 (C) and the second stage-only reach effect shown in FIG. 106 (G). Therefore, the expected value of the jackpot when the first stage dedicated reach or the second stage dedicated reach is performed is the same.

That is, in the changing effect C shown in FIG. 106, the effect stage selected from the effect stages having a plurality of different background images is displayed as the stay stage, and each effect is displayed in each of the plurality of effect stages. It is possible to perform a dedicated reach effect with no difference in the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) corresponding to the stage.

[Fluctuating production D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during fluctuation.
In the changing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the G zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone entry effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), and the display screen 7a is still switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. That is, the timing of entering the G zone in the G zone entering effect shown in FIG. 107 (B) is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character image "G zone!" Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The G zone is an effect accompanied by displaying information suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, and is a specific image effect in which the background, motif, and the like are different from the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the G zone variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone variation effect is performed by switching the character image of "G zone!" Shown in FIG. 107 (B). When the G zone fluctuation effect is executed, the upper telop (subtitle) UT and the lower telop (subtitle) ST flow in the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a to the right end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "chance" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The letters "G zone" and "chance" flow repeatedly in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (to the right). In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "chance" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The letters "G zone" and "chance" flow repeatedly in the direction indicated by the arrow YAL (to the left). Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the process of changing before stopping, and the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 107 (A) is the G zone variation. It shows that it continues until the production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIGS. 107 (A) and 107 (C) has been lost. In this example, "958" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement.

On the other hand, after the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A) is executed, the reach effect shown in FIG. 107 (E) may be executed instead of FIG. 107 (B). In this reach effect, as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows the situation. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), the G zone entry effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone entry effect is the reach effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), and the display screen 7a is still switched before the decorative symbol 8C is stopped. That is, the rush timing to the G zone in the G zone rush effect shown in FIG. 107 (F) is in the reach before the decorative symbol 8C is stopped. That is, the timing of entering the G zone shown in FIG. 107 (B) is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, whereas the timing of entering the G zone shown in FIG. 107 (F) is changed. The timing is in the reach after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character image "G zone!" Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), the G zone reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone reach effect is performed by switching the character image of "G zone!" Shown in FIG. 107 (F). When the G zone reach effect is executed, the upper telop (subtitle) UT and the lower telop (subtitle) ST flow on the upper and lower parts of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a to the right end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "fever" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "fever" repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAR (to the right). In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a to the left end while tapering upward, and the characters "G zone" and "fever" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "fever" repeatedly flow in the direction indicated by the arrow YAL (to the left). In addition, the reach effect is displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107 (G), in the reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left end of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right end, and a predetermined character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to perform the reach production of. The predetermined reach effect is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect, a story effect, or the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 107 (A) was a jackpot as a result of the reach effect of FIGS. 107 (E) and 107 (G). .. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the loss symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) described above is not always performed, and the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have stopped compared to when the entry timing to the G zone is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. It is higher during the later reach (the later the entry timing to the G zone, the higher the probability that the jackpot confirmation production will be performed), and the characters in the telop in the G zone production are "Fever" rather than "Chance". Is higher.

That is, in the changing effect D shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute a zone effect accompanied by displaying information suggesting the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is the timing of entering the G zone and the character display in the G zone. It is designed to change depending on the contents of. That is, when the fluctuation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a big hit, there is a high probability that the timing of entering the G zone will be delayed, and the character in the telop in the production of the G zone is "fever". The probability of being is high.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect during fluctuation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, it is possible to display a certain character image or mark image as the first display, and the first effect is the first display. It is an effect that changes the degree of transparency of the image, and is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the degree of transparency of the first display image. According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation changes depending on the difference in the transparency of the first display image, so that the player is delighted by the difference in the transparency of the first display image. Further, by displaying the first display image with various different transparency degrees, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation degree in various ways. Furthermore, as shown in the changing effect B, the first display image is displayed in relation to the movement of the movable accessory, and the color scheme of the first display image is associated with the degree of transparency to obtain a jackpot expectation. It is also possible to change. In particular, by making the movable accessory and the first display image the same, it is possible to make them more related. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot expectation level increases as the transparency level of the first display image increases. According to this configuration, the player can face the game with great expectation when the first display image is displayed as an image having a high degree of transparency. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, it is possible to execute the display of the effect stage in which a plurality of background images are selected from different effect stages as the second display, and the second effect. Is configured to perform a dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage displayed in the second display. According to this configuration, a dedicated reach specialized for each production stage is provided, so that the player can easily determine the production stage in which he / she is currently staying by looking at this dedicated reach. .. For example, if the gaming state is related to the production stage, the player can easily determine the current gaming state simply by looking at the dedicated reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage has a configuration in which there is no difference in the jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit regardless of which stage the dedicated reach is performed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute the display of a certain zone effect accompanied by the display of information suggesting the jackpot expectation degree as the third display, and the third effect is It is possible to execute an effect of rushing into the zone effect at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot expectation is configured to change depending on the rush timing of the zone effect. According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation changes at the timing of entering the zone production, so that the player will be delighted by the difference in the timing of entering the zone production. In addition, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation degree in various ways by performing the timing of entering the zone effect at various different timings. Furthermore, by associating the timing of entering the zone production with the information display of the jackpot expectation suggested by the zone production, it is possible to change the jackpot expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect during fluctuation.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the first display having a different degree of transparency is displayed by the character (logo) image of "G", but the present invention shows the present invention. It is not limited to this. For example, the first display may be an image of a symbol, a mark, or an object or an article having a specific shape, instead of the character (logo) image.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the expectation of the jackpot changes depending on the transparency and the color scheme of the first display, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the expected degree of jackpot may change depending on the size of the first display, the number of displays, or the timing of display.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, it is shown that each of the plurality of production stages is provided with a dedicated reach effect corresponding to each production stage, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a plurality of dedicated reach effects may be performed on one production stage, or the number of dedicated reach effects set may be different for each production stage.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation is suggested by the difference in the timing of entering the zone effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the contents of the hold may be pre-read, and the expected degree of jackpot of fluctuations related to the hold may be suggested by the difference in the timing of entering the zone effect. In this way, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation over a plurality of fluctuations. In the changing effect D shown in FIG. 107, the timing of entering the zone effect was shown to be during the symbol change and during the reach. It may be during reach.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the zone production, the characters indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed on the upper telop and the lower telop are the same, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the characters displayed on the upper telop and the lower telop may be different. In this way, the jackpot expectation can be further changed by the combination of the characters displayed on the upper telop and the lower telop.
In addition, the characters displayed on the telop flow within the horizontal band of the telop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot expectation is extremely high, the characters displayed on the telop may be displayed larger than the horizontal band of the telop. Alternatively, the horizontal band itself may be erased to display only the characters.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B7-1]
A production means that can perform multiple productions,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display of a certain character image or mark image, and is
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect.
The first effect is an effect of changing the degree of transparency of the first display image, and is an effect of suggesting a jackpot expectation degree by the degree of transparency of the first display image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B7-2]
The jackpot expectation increases as the transparency of the first display image increases.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1.
[Aspect B7-3]
One of the plurality of displays is a second display.
The second display is a display of the production stage in which a plurality of background images are selected from different production stages.
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect.
The second effect is an effect that performs a dedicated reach corresponding to the effect stage displayed in the second display.
The gaming machine according to the aspect B7-1 or the aspect B7-2.
[Aspect B7-4]
Each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the production stage has no difference in the jackpot expectation.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-3.
[Aspect B7-5]
One of the plurality of indications is a third indication,
The third display is a display of a certain zone effect accompanied by a display of information suggesting the jackpot expectation.
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect.
The third effect is an effect of rushing into the zone effect at a predetermined timing.
The jackpot expectation level changes depending on the rush timing of the zone effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4.

The character display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. This character display effect is an effect of displaying characters (including kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers, symbols, marks, etc.) displayed on the display screen in a predetermined mode, and the game state is set to a predetermined state. It can be executed at such times.

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 108 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 108 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), on the display screen 7a, the round number overhang display effect is executed. When a jackpot occurs, the display of the jackpot symbol array "777" shown in FIG. 108 (B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 108 (C). In this round number overhang display effect, in the round display RSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot this time, 16 numbers are displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and the lower end thereof is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Has been done. It should be noted that R in the display of "16R" is displayed in a manner that fits in the display screen 7a at the lower right of the number 16.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), the display effect of protruding the number of balls is executed on the display screen 7a. This overhanging number of balls display effect switches from the round display RSH screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 108 (C), and displays the jackpot number of balls suggestion display DSH that suggests the number of jackpots of this time. It is a production. In this out-of-ball number protrusion display effect, in the jackpot out-of-ball number suggestion display DSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of out-of-balls is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of "2200 MAX" which suggests the number of balls to be hit this time, the number of 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 108 (D). (2 at the left end is displayed so that a part of the left end also protrudes from the display screen 7a). The MAX of the "2200 MAX" display is displayed below the number 2200 so as to fit in the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls to be ejected in this 16R jackpot.

That is, in the character display effect A shown in FIG. 108, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the ball output number suggestion display DSH when the jackpot is hit is displayed from the display screen 7a as the character display related to the jackpot. It is designed to be displayed in a protruding manner.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 109 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 109 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the display effect of the number of rounds protruding is executed on the display screen 7a. When a jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array "777" shown in FIG. 109 (B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 109 (C). In this round number overhang display effect, in the round display RSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot this time, the number 16 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and the lower end thereof is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (C). Has been done. It should be noted that R in the display of "16R" is displayed in a manner that fits in the display screen 7a at the lower right of the number 16.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), the display effect of protruding the number of balls is executed on the display screen 7a. This overhanging number of balls display effect switches from the round display RSH screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 109 (C), and displays the jackpot number of balls suggestion display DSH that suggests the number of jackpots of this time. It is a production. In this out-of-ball number protrusion display effect, in the jackpot out-of-ball number suggestion display DSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of out-of-balls is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of the "2200 MAX" that suggests the number of big hits this time, the number of 2200 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (D). (2 at the left end is displayed so that a part of the left end also protrudes from the display screen 7a). The MAX of the "2200 MAX" display is displayed below the number 2200 so as to fit in the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls to be ejected in this 16R jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), the Fever V protruding display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This Fever V overhang display effect switches from the screen of the jackpot suggestion display DSH, which suggests the number of jackpots shown in FIG. 109 (D), to the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, which suggests that the jackpot has been hit. It is a production to display. In this Fever V protruding display effect, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a part of a specific character in the character string (alphabet) suggesting a jackpot is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, of the "FEVER" that suggests that it was a big hit this time, only the letter V is enlarged and displayed, and a part of the upper end and the lower end protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (E). Is displayed. Then, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the character V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of other characters (characters E on both sides of V) constituting the character string. It is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), a right-handed V winning instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot this time is the above-mentioned jackpot scheduled to pass through 16RV, and in this right-handed V winning instruction effect, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened, making it easier to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30. It is performed at the beginning of the round game. In this right-handed V winning instruction effect, a message MGL consisting of the characters "Aim for V!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "V" is larger than the other characters in this message MGL. (About twice) is displayed. A right-handed arrow YAR1 for urging the player to hit right is displayed above the message MGL, and a message MGU1 consisting of the characters "right-handed" is displayed in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR1. .. The player is prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR1 to hit right, so that the game ball can be won in the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), the V protrusion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This V protrusion display effect is a round game in which the passage to the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easy, and is performed when the game ball passes through the V region 39. That is, in the V protrusion display effect, when the game ball passes through the V area 39, the screen is switched from the right-handed V winning instruction effect screen shown in FIG. 109 (F), and the game ball passes through the V area 39. It is an effect of displaying the suggestion V region passage suggestion display VRH. In this V overhang display effect, in the V region passage suggestion display VRH, a part of a single character suggesting that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, the character "V" suggesting that the game ball has passed through the V region 39 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and the lower end thereof is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (G). ing.

That is, in the character display effect B shown in FIG. 109, a part of the characters in the round display RSH at the time of the big hit and the ball output number suggestion display DSH as the character display related to the big hit is displayed from the display screen 7a. It is designed to be displayed in a protruding manner. Further, as a character display related to the big hit, a part of the specific characters in the big hit suggestion display FEHV suggesting that the big hit has been made is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. Further, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the specific characters enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a are displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. In addition, as a character display related to the jackpot, a part of the characters in the V area passage suggestion display VRH suggesting that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 110A, it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 110 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the display effect of the number of rounds protruding is executed on the display screen 7a. When a jackpot occurs, the display of the jackpot symbol array "777" shown in FIG. 110 (B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 110 (C). In this round number overhang display effect, in the round display RSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot this time, the number 16 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and the lower end thereof is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (C). Has been done. It should be noted that R in the display of "16R" is displayed in a manner that fits in the display screen 7a at the lower right of the number 16.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), the display effect of protruding the number of balls is executed on the display screen 7a. This overhanging number of balls display effect switches from the round display RSH screen showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 110 (C), and displays the jackpot number of balls suggestion display DSH that suggests the number of jackpots of this time. It is a production. In this out-of-ball number protrusion display effect, in the jackpot out-of-ball number suggestion display DSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of out-of-balls is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of the "2200 MAX" that suggests the number of balls to be hit this time, the number of 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (D). (2 at the left end is displayed so that a part of the left end also protrudes from the display screen 7a). The MAX of the "2200 MAX" display is displayed below the number 2200 so as to fit in the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls to be ejected in this 16R jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), the fever disjointed display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever disjoint display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the jackpot number of balls suggestion display DSH, which suggests the number of jackpots shown in FIG. 110 (D). In this fever disjointed display effect, a character string (alphabet) suggesting that a big hit has been achieved is moved and displayed character by character. That is, the character string of "FEVER" suggesting that the jackpot has been won this time is separated one by one and displayed by moving from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 110 (E), the character strings of "FEVER" are separated one by one in the order of "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F" from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. The movement is displayed while swinging to. Therefore, in FIG. 110 (E), the first moved and displayed "R" is displayed in the smallest size, and the last moved and displayed "F" is displayed in the largest size. A part of the lower end of this "F" protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (E). That is, when each character that is moved and displayed one character at a time is located in front of the display screen 7a, a part of the character is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), the entire fever reduced display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As a result of executing the fever disparity display effect shown in FIG. 110 (E), the characters "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F" are displayed on the display screen 7a. After moving all the characters to the back side and displaying them in a reduced size, they are arranged to form a character string of "FEVER", and all the characters are displayed on the display screen 7a as a whole. That is, the overall reduced display effect of the fever is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHS suggesting that the jackpot has been reached. As shown in FIG. 110 (F), in the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, all the characters are reduced and displayed as a whole in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. However, of "FEVER", only the character V is displayed in a larger size than the other characters, and the other characters are displayed in the same size.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this Fever V protruding enlarged display effect, the character string of "FEVER", which is reduced to approximately the center of the display screen 7a and displayed as a whole in the Fever overall reduced display effect shown in FIG. 110 (F), is reversed this time. The display screen 7a is integrally moved from the back side to the front side and displayed in an enlarged manner. That is, the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHV suggesting that the jackpot has been reached. Similar to the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. 110 (F), this jackpot suggestion display FEHV is displayed by enlarging only the letter V among the “FEVER” suggesting that the jackpot has been achieved, and the upper end thereof and the jackpot suggestion display FEHV. A part of the lower end is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (G). Then, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the character V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of other characters (characters E on both sides of V) constituting the character string. It is displayed.

That is, in the character display effect C shown in FIG. 110, a part of the characters in the round display RSH at the time of the big hit and the ball output number suggestion display DSH as the character display related to the big hit is displayed from the display screen 7a. It is designed to be displayed in a protruding manner. In addition, as a character display related to a jackpot, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS suggesting that a jackpot has been achieved is displayed in the display screen 7a with all characters reduced and displayed as a whole, and only specific characters are displayed more than other characters. It is designed to be enlarged and displayed. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV as a character display related to the jackpot, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS is enlarged and displayed, and a part of the specific characters protrudes from the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be displayed. Further, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the specific characters enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a are displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 111A, the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 111A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 111 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), on the display screen 7a, the round number overhang display effect is executed. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array "777" shown in FIG. 111 (B) is switched to the round display RSH showing the number of rounds of the current jackpot shown in FIG. 111 (C). In this round number overhang display effect, in the round display RSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of the display of "16R" indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot this time, 16 numbers are displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and the lower end thereof is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Has been done. It should be noted that R in the display of "16R" is displayed in a manner that fits in the display screen 7a at the lower right of the number 16.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the display effect of protruding the number of balls is executed on the display screen 7a. This overhanging number of balls display effect switches from the screen of the round display RSH showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 111 (C), and displays the jackpot number of balls suggestion display DSH that suggests the number of jackpots of this time. It is a production. In this out-of-ball number protrusion display effect, in the jackpot out-of-ball number suggestion display DSH, a part of the numbers indicating the number of out-of-balls is displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, out of the "2200 MAX" that suggests the number of big hits this time, the number of 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end thereof is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (D). (2 at the left end is displayed so that a part of the left end also protrudes from the display screen 7a). The MAX of the "2200 MAX" display is displayed below the number 2200 so as to fit in the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX suggests the upper limit of the number of balls to be ejected in this 16R jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), the fever disjointed display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This fever disjoint display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the jackpot number of balls suggestion display DSH, which suggests the number of jackpots shown in FIG. 111 (D). In this fever disjointed display effect, a character string (alphabet) suggesting that a big hit has been achieved is moved and displayed character by character. That is, the character string of "FEVER" suggesting that the jackpot has been won this time is separated one by one and displayed by moving from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 111 (E), the character strings of "FEVER" are separated one by one in the order of "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F" from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. The movement is displayed while swinging to. Therefore, in FIG. 111 (E), the first moved and displayed "R" is displayed in the smallest size, and the last moved and displayed "F" is displayed in the largest size. Then, a part of the lower end of this "F" is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (E). That is, when each character that is moved and displayed one character at a time is located in front of the display screen 7a, a part of the character is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), on the display screen 7a, the entire fever reduced rotation display effect is executed. As a result of executing the fever disjointed display effect shown in FIG. 111 (E), the characters "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F" are displayed on the display screen 7a. After moving all the characters to the back side of the screen and displaying them in a reduced size, they are arranged to form a character string of "FEVER", and all the characters are displayed on the display screen 7a as a whole. That is, the overall reduced rotation display effect of the fever is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHS suggesting that the jackpot has been reached. As shown in FIG. 111 (F), in the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, all the characters are reduced and displayed as a whole in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. However, of "FEVER", only the character V is displayed in a larger size than the other characters, and the other characters are displayed in the same size. Then, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS is reduced and displayed as a whole in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and then horizontally rotated in the state of being entirely displayed as shown by the arrow YA at the same position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this Fever V protruding enlarged display effect, the character string of "FEVER", which is reduced to approximately the center of the display screen 7a and displayed entirely in the Fever overall reduced rotation display effect shown in FIG. 111 (F), rotates horizontally. It is stopped, and on the contrary, the display screen 7a is moved and displayed integrally from the back side to the front side, and is enlarged and displayed. That is, the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEHV suggesting that the jackpot has been reached. Similar to the jackpot suggestion display FEHS shown in FIG. 111 (F), this jackpot suggestion display FEHV is displayed by enlarging only the letter V of the “FEVER” suggesting that the jackpot has been achieved, and the upper end thereof and the jackpot suggestion display FEHV. A part of the lower end is displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (G). Then, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the character V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a covers a part of other characters (characters E on both sides of V) constituting the character string. It is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), the fever display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This Fever V display effect is the Fever V protruding enlarged display effect shown in FIG. 111 (G), and is an effect of reducing the characters V displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a. That is, the fever display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot suggestion display FEH that suggests that the jackpot has been reached. In this jackpot suggestion display FEH, the character V that protrudes from the display screen 7a shown in FIG. 111 (G) is reduced, and all the character strings (“FEVER”) are displayed in the display screen 7a. However, of "FEVER", only the character V is displayed in a larger size than the other characters, and the other characters are displayed in the same size. Then, in this jackpot suggestion display FEH, the letter V is displayed so as not to cover a part of other letters (the letter E on both sides of V) constituting the character string.

That is, in the character display effect D shown in FIG. 111, a part of the characters in the round display RSH and the ball output number suggestion display DSH when the jackpot is hit is displayed from the display screen 7a as the character display related to the jackpot. It is designed to be displayed in a protruding manner. In addition, as a character display related to a jackpot, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS suggesting that a jackpot has been achieved is displayed in the display screen 7a with all characters reduced and displayed as a whole, and only specific characters are displayed more than other characters. It is designed to be enlarged and displayed. Further, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV as a character display related to the jackpot, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS is enlarged and displayed, and a part of the specific characters protrudes from the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be displayed. Further, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the specific characters enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen 7a are displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. As a character display related to the jackpot, the jackpot suggestion display FEH suggesting that the jackpot has become a jackpot is a reduced display of specific characters protruding from the display screen 7a of the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, and all character strings are displayed. It is designed to fit in the screen 7a. However, in this jackpot suggestion display FEH, a specific character is displayed in a larger size than other characters and is displayed so as not to cover other characters constituting the character string.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect during fluctuation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, it is possible to execute the character display related to the jackpot as the first display, and in the first effect, a part of the characters in the character display is , It is configured so that it can be displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen. According to this configuration, the character display related to the jackpot can be appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display related to the jackpot, which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the character display is composed of a plurality of characters, and the first effect is to enlarge a specific character in the character display from the display screen. It is configured to be displayed in a protruding manner. According to this configuration, a specific character in the character display related to the jackpot can be appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display related to the jackpot, which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make specific characters stand out in a shape and color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character display. It is configured so that it can be done. According to this configuration, only a specific character in the character display related to the jackpot can be strongly appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display related to the jackpot, which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make specific characters stand out in a shape and color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the second effect is to display a character display composed of a plurality of characters on the display screen one by one, and then display the display screen. It is possible to display all the characters inside, and the first production is configured to be performed after the second production. According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal to the player in a manner having an extremely strong impact on the character display consisting of a plurality of characters related to the jackpot. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display related to the jackpot, which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the third effect is performed after the first effect, and the specific characters displayed in the manner protruding from the display screen in the first effect are displayed. , It is an effect of reducing and displaying so as to fit in the display screen, and in the mode in which a specific character is reduced and displayed, it is configured to be displayed larger than other characters constituting the character display. According to this configuration, even if a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen is reduced, it is displayed larger than the other characters constituting the character display, so that the character display related to the jackpot is displayed. It is possible to appeal a specific character among the characters to the player in an extremely high-impact manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display related to the jackpot, which is extremely important in the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make specific characters stand out in a shape and color scheme to further appeal to the player.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect during fluctuation.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover all of the other characters constituting the character display.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the numbers in "2200 MAX" suggesting the number of jackpot balls are displayed in such a manner that all the numbers protrude from the display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the numbers in "2200 MAX" may be displayed in such a manner that only a part of the numbers protrudes from the display screen (for example, a part of 2 displayed at the left end protrudes from the display screen). Display in mode). Further, MAX is designed to fit in the display screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all or some characters of MAX are displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen. May be good.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the right-handed V winning instruction effect is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened, and the V region 39 in the first winning opening 30 This is done at the start of the round game, which makes it easier to pass through, that is, the V-winning remaining time notification effect is performed by a game machine commonly known as a V-ST machine. It is not limited to. For example, the right-handed V winning instruction effect is performed when the variable start port (special 2) is used and the two types of attackers having the V area are opened, that is, the game machine commonly known as the one type and two types mixer is used. You may do so.

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a part of the characters in the character display is displayed in a manner of protruding from one display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are the first display screen. It may be displayed with. In this way, the characters protruding from the display screen are displayed closer to the player, and can be strongly appealed to the player in an extremely impactful manner. An image display device having a first display screen and a second display screen may be configured to be capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D). By doing so, it is possible to further appeal to the player by displaying the characters protruding from the display screen in 3D.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a part of the characters in the character display related to the jackpot is displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen, but the present invention has the present invention. It is not limited to this. For example, the characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen are characters that instruct the operation of the effect button (for example, press, push, and continuous hit) or characters that instruct right-handed hit (for example, instead of the characters related to the jackpot. , Aim to the right, hit right, turn the handle), etc., some of the characters in the character display related to the game instruction may be displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
A production means that can perform multiple productions,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The first display is a character display related to a jackpot.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect.
In the first effect, a part of the characters in the character display may be displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-2]
The character display consists of a plurality of characters.
In the first effect, a specific character in the character display is enlarged and displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C1-1.
[Aspect C1-3]
The specific character displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover a part or all of other characters constituting the character display.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C1-2.
[Aspect C1-4]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect.
The second effect is an effect in which the character display composed of the plurality of characters is displayed on the display screen one by one, and then all the characters are displayed as a whole on the display screen.
The first production is performed after the second production.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C1-2 or the aspect C1-3.
[Aspect C1-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect.
The third effect is an effect performed after the first effect.
The third effect is an effect of reducing and displaying the specific characters displayed in a manner protruding from the display screen in the first effect so as to fit in the display screen.
In the reduced display mode, the specific character is displayed larger than the other characters constituting the character display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-2 to C1-4.

The following will be described with reference to FIGS. This pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing in relation to the content of the hold during the jackpot game. For example, if the content of the hold is pre-read during the jackpot game and there is a jackpot in the content of the hold, it can be executed during the round game, during the ending, or immediately after the end of the jackpot game.

[Holding Uchiren Chan Suggestion Production A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the pending inner ream suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 112 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 112 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is first performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It has become like. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 112 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown in the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game production, the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is increased by one and changed from "3" to "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the pending internal ream suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this pending internal ream suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds indicates "8R" at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the reserved numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. There is. In addition, in this hold Uchiren Chan suggestion production, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), when a game ball wins a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, the hold that occurred during the jackpot game A sound effect KM suggesting that there is a big hit, that is, suggesting a pending internal ream chan, is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, the sound effect "Talary Lara" is shown). The ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when hitting right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In this ending effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed based on the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, and the hold that occurred during the jackpot game is sequentially digested. In the hold digestion decoration symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (F), the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is reduced from "4" to "2". That is, in this hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect, two hold of the first special symbol are digested from the ending effect (end of the jackpot game) shown in FIG. 112 (E) above. That is, the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112 (F) corresponds to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the reach symbol. Indicates that it has stopped. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect shows that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 112 (F) was a jackpot as a result of the reach effect of FIGS. 112 (E) and 112 (G). .. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 112 (H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot will be lost with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 112, when a specific winning opening (in this example, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. A predetermined sound effect KM is emitted from the speaker 67, and the sound effect KM suggests that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game, that is, an effect suggesting a hold inner ream chan is performed. ing.

[Holding Uchiren Chan Suggestion Production B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the pending internal ream suggestion effect B.
In the hold inner ream suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When a jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is first performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It has become like. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown in the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed.
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the round game production shown in FIG. 113 (A), H1 indicates “4” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "4" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the pending internal ream suggestion 1 effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this hold-in-ream suggestion 1 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds indicates "8R" in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the hold numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. ing. In addition, in this pending Uchiren Chan Suggestion 1 production, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when a game ball wins a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, it occurs during a big hit game. The speaker 67 emits a line SM1 that suggests that there is a big hit on the hold, that is, a line that suggests a hold inner chain (in this example, the line "maybe a chance!" Is shown). The ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when hitting right. Furthermore, in the hold inner ream suggestion 1 production, the dialogue SM1 (“maybe a chance!”) Suggesting the hold inner ream chan emitted by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is as the dialogue display SMH1 on the display screen 7a. .. With this dialogue display SMH1, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending internal ream Chan even if he misses the dialogue SM1.

On the other hand, after the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A) is executed, the hold internal continuous Chan suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) may be executed instead of FIG. 113 (B). In this hold-in-ream suggestion 2 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds indicates "8R" in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the hold numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. ing. Further, in this pending Uchiren Chan Suggestion 2 production, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), when the game ball wins the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the big hit game. The speaker 67 emits a line SM2 that suggests that there is a big hit on hold, that is, suggests that the hold is in the middle (in this example, the line "It's not over yet!" Is shown). There is. Furthermore, in the Hold Uchiren Chan Suggestion 2 production, the dialogue SM1 (“I'm not finished yet!”) Suggesting the Hold Uchiren Chan emitted by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is as the dialogue display SMH2 on the display screen 7a. ing. With this dialogue display SMH2, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending internal ream Chan even if he misses the dialogue SM2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In this ending effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed based on the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, and the hold that occurred during the jackpot game is sequentially digested. In the hold digestion decoration symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E), the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is reduced from "4" to "2". That is, in this hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect, two hold of the first special symbol are digested from the ending effect (end of the jackpot game) shown in FIG. 113 (D) above. That is, the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) corresponds to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), the loss symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R was lost in the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E). In this example, "958" is shown as this lost symbol arrangement.

On the other hand, after the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E) is executed, the reach effect shown in FIG. 113 (G) may be executed instead of FIG. 113 (F). In this reach effect, as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. Indicates that it has stopped. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) was a jackpot as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 113 (G). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 113 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 113 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is higher when the hold inner chain suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) is executed, and the hold inner chain suggestion 1 effect shown in FIG. 113 (B). Is higher than when was executed. In other words, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is when the line SM2 "It's not over yet!", Which suggests the pending Uchiren Chan, is issued, and when the line SM1 "Maybe a chance!" Is issued. Is higher than.

That is, in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 113, when a specific winning opening (in this example, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. A predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and this line suggests that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game, that is, an effect suggesting a hold inner ream chan is performed. Moreover, in the hold inner ream suggestion effect B, the expectation (reliability) of the hold inner ream chan changes depending on the content (type) of the dialogue, and the dialogue emitted from the speaker 67 is directly displayed on the display screen 7a. It is designed to be displayed as a display.

[Holding Uchiren Chan Suggestion Production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pending internal ream suggestion effect C.
In the pending inner ream suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 114 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 114 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is first performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It has become like. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown in the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game production, the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is increased by one and changed from "3" to "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), on the display screen 7a, the pending in-round continuous Chan suggestion effect is executed. In this round-holding Uchiren-chan suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds is "8R" in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the holding numbers H1 and H2 are the same "4" and "0" as before. Shown. In addition, in this round pending Uchiren Chan suggestion production, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), when a game ball wins a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, it occurs during a big hit game. The speaker 67 now emits a line SM that suggests that there is a big hit on the hold, that is, a line that suggests the hold inside Ren Chan (in this example, the line "It's not over yet!" Is shown). ing. The ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when hitting right. Furthermore, in the hold Uchiren Chan suggestion production during the round, the dialogue SM (“Not finished yet!”) Suggesting the Hold Uchiren Chan emitted by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the dialogue display SMH. It has become. With this dialogue display SMH, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending Uchiren Chan even if he misses the dialogue SM. Here, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), a predetermined character CRA is drawn on the front plate portion of the main body of the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, the character CRA motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending hold internal continuous Chan suggestion effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In addition, in this ending hold inner ream suggestion effect, the hold numbers H1 and H2 show the same "4" and "0" as before. Here, in this ending hold inner ream suggestion effect, the background of the display screen 7a is configured by using the same character CRA as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, in this ending hold inner ream suggestion effect, a specific image with the character CRA as a motif is displayed. In other words, at the ending of the jackpot game, this specific image is displayed to suggest the pending Uchiren Chan.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed based on the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, and the hold that occurred during the jackpot game is sequentially digested. In the hold digestion decoration symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (F), the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is reduced from "4" to "2". That is, in this hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect, it is shown that two hold of the first special symbol has been digested from the ending hold inner ream suggestion effect (end of the jackpot game) shown in FIG. 114 (E) above. There is. That is, the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) corresponds to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the hold digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in the reach symbol. Indicates that it has stopped. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) was a jackpot as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 114 (G). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot will be lost with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is that when the ending hold internal chain suggestion effect shown in FIG. 114 (E) is executed, the ending hold internal chain suggestion effect is not executed (character). It is higher than (when a normal ending effect in which a specific image with a CRA motif is not displayed) is executed. More specifically, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) will be performed is as follows. That is, the highest is when the holding inner ream suggestion effect (Fig. 114 (D)) and the ending hold inner ream suggestion effect (Fig. 114 (E)) are performed during the round, and only the ending hold inner ream suggestion effect is performed. The next highest was when it was performed, the next highest was when only the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect was performed during the round, and when the Ending Hold Uchiren Chan suggestion effect and the ending Hold Uchiren Chan suggestion effect were not performed. Is the lowest.

That is, in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect C shown in FIG. 114, when a specific winning opening (in this example, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. A predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and this line suggests that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game, that is, an effect suggesting a hold inner ream chan is performed. Moreover, in the hold inner ream suggestion effect C, the dialogue emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as a dialogue display. In addition, in the pending internal ream suggestion effect C, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 that caused the dialogue SM suggesting the pending internal ream to be issued, and the ending of the jackpot game is set. By displaying a specific image using this predetermined motif, it is suggested that there is a big hit in the hold that occurred during the big hit game, that is, a production that suggests the hold inner ream Chan is performed. ing. That is, in the hold inner chain suggestion effect C, a plurality of types of hold inner chain suggestion effects can be executed at different timings, that is, the hold inner chain suggestion effect and the ending hold inner chain suggestion effect. ..

[Holding Uchiren Chan Suggestion Production D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the pending internal ream suggestion effect D.
In the pending inner ream suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 115 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of holds are displayed side by side. H1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 115 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect suggesting the start of the jackpot game (round game) is first performed on the display screen 7a, and then the round game effect is executed. It has become like. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown in the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, “5R” is shown), and in the center of the display screen 7a, A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game production, the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is increased by one and changed from "3" to "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), on the display screen 7a, the pending in-round continuous Chan suggestion effect is executed. In this round-holding Uchiren-chan suggestion effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds is "8R" in the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the holding numbers H1 and H2 are the same "4" and "0" as before. Shown. In addition, in this round pending Uchiren Chan suggestion production, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), when a game ball wins a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during a round game, it occurs during a big hit game. The speaker 67 now emits a line SM that suggests that there is a big hit on the hold, that is, a line that suggests the hold inside Ren Chan (in this example, the line "It's not over yet!" Is shown). ing. The ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when hitting right. Furthermore, in the hold Uchiren Chan suggestion production during the round, the dialogue SM (“Not finished yet!”) Suggesting the Hold Uchiren Chan emitted by the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as the dialogue display SMH. It has become. With this dialogue display SMH, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending Uchiren Chan even if he misses the dialogue SM. Here, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a pattern imitating an airplane HK is drawn on the front plate portion of the main body of the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, the motif of the airplane HK is set in the ordinary winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In this ending effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), on the display screen 7a, the pending internal ream suggestion effect is executed after the jackpot ends. The pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect after the end of the jackpot is a display effect performed by switching the screen of the ending effect shown in FIG. 115 (E), that is, immediately after the end of the jackpot game. After the end of the jackpot, the hold Uchiren Chan suggestion effect is based on the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, and the decorative pattern is changed, so that the hold that occurred during the jackpot game is sequentially digested. In the post-hit end-holding internal ream suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115 (F), the hold number H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 has decreased from "4" to "3". .. In other words, in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect after the end of the jackpot, the appearance of digesting the first hold of the first special symbol from the ending effect (end of the jackpot game) shown in FIG. 115 (E) above. Shown. That is, the variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) corresponds to the first reserved digestion of the first special symbol immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Here, in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect after the big hit, the background of the display screen 7a is configured by using the same airplane HK as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. In other words, a specific image with the motif of an airplane HK is displayed in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion production after the end of the jackpot. That is, in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect after the end of the jackpot, a background image is constructed using a specific image with the motif of an airplane HK as a display effect to be performed immediately after the end of the jackpot game by switching the screen of the ending effect, and this background image. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the top in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R reach as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect after the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It shows that it stopped in the symbol array. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G), the number of reservations H2 shows the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 has decreased from "3" to "2". That is, in this reach effect, it is shown that two hold of the first special symbol has been digested from the end of the big hit game in the effect of suggesting the pending Uchiren Chan after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 115 (F) above. That is, the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G) corresponds to the second reserved digestion of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. In this reach effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), on the display screen 7a, a background image using a specific image with an airplane HK as a motif is held after the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It is continuously displayed from the continuous Chan suggestion production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) was a jackpot as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 115 (G). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) is not always performed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot will be lost with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect will be performed is that the hold inner chain suggestion effect after the end of the jackpot is not executed when the hold inner chain suggestion effect is executed after the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It is higher than when (when the specific image with the airplane HK as a motif is not displayed and the normal decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 115 (A) is executed). More specifically, the probability that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) will be performed is as follows. That is, the highest is when the hold inner ream suggestion effect (Fig. 115 (D)) during the round and the hold inner ream suggestion effect (Fig. 115 (F)) are performed after the jackpot ends, and the hold inner ream suggestion effect after the jackpot ends The next highest was when only the suggestion effect was performed, the next highest was when only the suggestion effect was performed during the round, and the next highest was when only the suggestion effect was performed. Is the lowest when is not done.

That is, in the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 115, when a specific winning opening (in this example, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, it is related to the winning. A predetermined line is emitted from the speaker 67, and this line suggests that there is a big hit in the hold generated during the big hit game, that is, an effect suggesting a hold inner ream chan is performed. Moreover, in the hold inner ream suggestion effect D, the dialogue emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as it is on the display screen 7a as a dialogue display. Further, in the hold inner ream suggestion effect D, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 that caused the dialogue SM suggesting the holding inner ream chan to be issued, and immediately after the jackpot game ends. By displaying a specific image (background image) using this predetermined motif in the decorative pattern variation effect of, it is further suggested that there is a jackpot in the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, that is, the hold inner ream chan. The production is designed to suggest. That is, in the hold inner chain suggestion effect D, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of hold inner chain suggestion effects at different timings, that is, the hold inner chain suggestion effect during the round and the hold inner chain suggestion effect after the big hit. ing.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the first effect suggests the degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan in relation to the winning of a specific winning opening during the jackpot game. It is structured to perform the production. According to this configuration, the player can adjust the firing intensity of the game ball and perform technical intervention in order to win the game ball to a specific winning opening during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, especially the monotonous jackpot game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan is performed by the voice generated in connection with the winning of a specific winning opening. It has become. According to this configuration, when suggesting the degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan, it is possible to notify the player in various ways in an easy-to-understand manner. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the expected degree of the pending internal ream is suggested by voice, the player does not need to pay attention to the display screen as compared with suggesting the expected degree of the reserved internal ream on the display. You can relax and enjoy the game. In addition, it is possible to easily change the expectation level of the pending internal chain depending on the type of voice. Furthermore, it is possible to further appeal to the player by drawing attention to the voice that suggests the expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan with a characteristic tone or melody.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the voice generated in connection with the winning of a specific winning opening is a serif, and the expectation of the pending internal ream Chan is the serif. It has a structure that changes depending on the type. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily change the expectation level of the pending internal ream chan by generating various contents of dialogue. As a result, the player can be happy and disappointed with the content of the dialogue that is emitted, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a predetermined motif is set in the specific winning opening, and in the first display, the background of the display screen is set in the specific winning opening. It is possible to display a specific image of the same motif as the motif that was created, and the second effect is to switch the background of the display screen to a specific image at a predetermined timing when the pending internal ream is performed. It has become. According to this configuration, when the background of the display screen is switched to a specific image, the player can face the game with great expectation. In addition, since the specific image has the same motif as the motif set for the specific winning opening, it is possible to appeal the specific winning opening to the player, and when the game ball wins the specific winning opening. You can have expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the timing of switching to the specific image is configured to be during the ending of the jackpot game or immediately after the end of the jackpot game. According to this configuration, immediately after the ending of the jackpot game or the end of the jackpot game, the player is grateful about whether or not to watch the display screen and switch to a specific image. That is, since it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is continuously chanted at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is not bored to the end, and as a result, the interest of the game can be extremely improved. In addition, the voice generated in connection with the winning of a specific winning opening during the round suggests the pending Uchiren Chan, and after that, after a while, the ending of the jackpot game or the specific image immediately after the jackpot game ends. By switching to, it becomes possible to suggest a pending internal chain, and as a result, the player can expect a pending internal chain for a long time. As a result, the player can maintain the interest of the game for a long time.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the hold internal ream suggestion effect is performed for the hold occurring during the jackpot game, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited. For example, if a specific winning opening is won while the game state is in a probabilistic state other than the jackpot state, a time saving state, or a normal state, the jackpot expectation in the hold that is occurring at that time is calculated. You may try to give a suggestive effect. In particular, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, it is advisable to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the hold related to the second special symbol. In this case, it is desirable that the specific winning opening and the second starting opening (second starting winning opening, electric chew) that fluctuates the second special symbol do not win unless the player hits right.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, the pending Uchiren Chan suggestion effect is such that when a specific winning opening is won, a predetermined line is emitted in connection with the winning. Although this is done, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the pending inner ream suggestion effect, a sound effect may be generated after the dialogue, and the sound effect may be different depending on the type of dialogue. By doing so, the dialogue becomes more prominent, and the player can easily grasp the type of dialogue. Alternatively, a sound effect may be generated after the dialogue is emitted, and the combination of the dialogue and the sound effect may indicate the degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan. In this way, the degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan can be changed in various ways and easily. In addition, the lines and sound effects emitted when a prize is won in this specific winning opening may be different depending on the round in which they occur.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a specific image (background image) using the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening is displayed during the ending of the jackpot game or The present invention is not limited to this, although the pending internal ream suggestion effect is performed by displaying the image immediately after the end of the jackpot game. For example, the pending internal ream suggestion effect by a specific image using this motif may be performed during a predetermined round of the jackpot game, or during the ending of the jackpot game, immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and during the jackpot game. It may be done in two or all of the predetermined rounds.

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the motif set in the specific winning opening and the motif of the specific image immediately after the ending of the jackpot game or the end of the jackpot game are predetermined characters. Alternatively, an airplane is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any motif may be used.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a specific image using the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening is performed on one display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is configured to be capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D) by providing a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and the specific image is stereoscopic. It may be displayed as an image (3D). By doing so, by displaying the specific image in 3D, it is possible to display a powerful specific image, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a production means capable of executing multiple effects.
One of the plurality of effects is the first effect.
The first production is a production performed during a jackpot game.
The first effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan in relation to winning a prize in a specific winning opening during the jackpot game.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C2-2]
The effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan is performed by the voice generated in connection with the winning of the specific winning opening.
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1.
[Aspect C2-3]
The voice generated in connection with winning the specific winning opening is a dialogue,
The degree of expectation of the pending Uchiren Chan changes depending on the type of the dialogue.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C2-2.
[Aspect C2-4]
Equipped with a display means that can display multiple displays
A predetermined motif is set for the specific winning opening,
One of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The first display is to display the background of the display screen with a specific image of the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening.
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect.
In the second effect, when the pending internal chain is performed, the background of the display screen is switched to the specific image at a predetermined timing.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3.
[Aspect C2-5]
The timing for switching to the specific image is during the round or ending of the jackpot game, or immediately after the end of the jackpot game.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C2-4.

The error display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. This error display effect can be executed when it is detected by a detection means such as a ball detection sensor that the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is full.

[Error display effect A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect A.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 116 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, as a result of variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows the situation. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 116 (A) was a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 116 (B). In this example, this jackpot symbol array is usually shown as a jackpot "888". In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect of whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to a probabilistic jackpot is performed at a predetermined timing, and the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 116 (D) is performed during this promotion effect. The button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "Button PUSH!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction for causing the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. A meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), the ball removal suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball-pulling suggestion display effect includes a ball-pulling operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in the game machine, and a ball-pulling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball-pulling operation by displaying characters. , Displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 116 (D), and the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are of the button image BOG and "button PUSH!". It is displayed so as to completely cover the character SIG. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is displayed by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters "Please remove the ball" are displayed directly above the ball removal operation image EG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), the ball removal suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball removal suggestion character effect, after the ball removal suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 116 (E) was performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball removal operation image EG was erased and only the ball removal operation message EM was displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of "button PUSH!" Is not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball removal suggestion display effect is performed for a predetermined time. Further, the message NG1 of "NO!" Is displayed in the display area of the button image BOG. This "NO!" Message NG1 suggests that the effect button 63 was not operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission failure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the jackpot promotion failure effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion failure production shows that the normal jackpot was not promoted to the probabilistic jackpot in the promotion production after all. Therefore, "888" of the normal jackpot symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the characters "promotion failure!" Are displayed above the "888" of the normal jackpot symbol array. Due to this jackpot promotion failure effect, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has not been promoted to the probabilistic jackpot. In addition, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed in this jackpot promotion failure effect, but this is a result of the player operating the operation lever to remove the ball before the jackpot promotion failure effect is performed. This is because the full tank of the ball tray (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated. If the full tank of the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is not cleared before the jackpot promotion failure effect is performed, the ball removal operation message EM will continue to be displayed even during the jackpot promotion failure effect. ..
It should be noted that the jackpot promotion failure effect shown in FIG. 116 (G) is always performed even when the message NG1 of "NO!" Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 116 (F). However, there is a possibility that the normal jackpot will be promoted to the probabilistic jackpot with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the error display effect A shown in FIG. 116, the storage of the game balls in the storage device (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and the effect is being displayed (button effect in the effect display). In the case of), a display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, in the ball removal suggestion display, the ball removal operation image EG suggesting the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located and the ball removal operation message EM prompting the ball removal operation by character display are displayed related to the effect button 63 ( It is displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a so as to cover the entire button image BOG and the character SIG of "button PUSH!". After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the ball removal operation image EG is deleted and the ball removal operation is performed. Only the message EM is displayed.

[Error display effect B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect B.
In the error display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 117 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 117 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows the situation. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 117 (A) was a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 117 (B). In this example, this jackpot symbol array is usually shown as a jackpot "888". In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect of whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to a probabilistic jackpot is performed at a predetermined timing, and the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 117 (D) is performed during this promotion effect. The button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, in other words, an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "Button PUSH!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction for causing the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. A meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), the ball removal suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball-pulling suggestion display effect includes a ball-pulling operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in the game machine, and a ball-pulling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball-pulling operation by displaying characters. indicate. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 117 (D), and the ball removal operation image EG covers a part of the button image BOG (the upper part of the button image BOG). Moreover, it is displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a so as to completely cover the character SIG of "button PUSH!". In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is displayed by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters "Please remove the ball" are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a in the upper left corner of the ball removal operation image EG. That is, the ball removing operation image EG and the ball removing operation message EM are displayed at a predetermined interval.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), the ball removal suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball removal suggestion character effect, after the ball removal suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 117 (E) was performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball removal operation image EG was erased and only the ball removal operation message EM was displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of "button PUSH!" Is not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball removal suggestion display effect is performed for a predetermined time. Further, the message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed in the display area of the button image BOG. This "OK!" Message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 was operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission success). When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, the ball removal operation message EM changes (moves) to approximately the center of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part (upper part) of the button image BOG. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion confirmation effect shows that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot in the promotion effect. Therefore, the display screen 7a shows "777" of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array, and the characters "promotion!" Are displayed above the "777" of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array. By this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the player recognizes that the normal jackpot has been promoted to the probabilistic jackpot. Further, in this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the ball removal operation message EM is not displayed, but this is a result of the player operating the operation lever to remove the ball before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed. This is because the full tank of the ball tray (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) has been eliminated. If the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is not fully filled before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed, the ball removal operation message EM will continue to be displayed even during the jackpot promotion confirmation effect. ..
It should be noted that the jackpot promotion confirmation effect shown in FIG. 117 (G) is always performed even when the message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 117 (F). There is a possibility that the normal jackpot will not be promoted to the probabilistic jackpot with a certain probability.

That is, in the error display effect B shown in FIG. 117, the storage of the game balls in the storage device (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and the effect is being displayed (button effect in the effect display). In the case of), a display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, in the ball removal suggestion display, the ball removal operation image EG indicating the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located is placed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the button image BOG and the entire character SIG. The ball removing operation message EM that is displayed and prompts the ball removing operation by displaying characters is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a apart from the ball removing operation image EG. After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the ball removal operation image EG is erased, and only the ball removal operation message EM is moved to the substantially center of the display screen 7a and displayed.

[Error display effect C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect C.
In the error display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 118 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, as a result of variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows the situation. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "7 ↓ 7". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), the button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an effect performed at a predetermined timing during the reach effect, for example, a timing immediately before the fluctuating intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped. The button operation instruction effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and is developed in the center of the display screen 7a. It is an image for prompting the operation. In other words, it is an image showing that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "Button PUSH!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction for causing the player to press the effect button 63 is executed. A meter MAT suggesting the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion at the bottom of the button image BOG. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is exhausted, the meter value is reached. Is displayed so that it is full.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the ball removal suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball-pulling suggestion display effect includes a ball-pulling operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in the game machine, and a ball-pulling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball-pulling operation by displaying characters. indicate. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 118 (C), and the ball removal operation image EG is displayed so as to completely cover the button image BOG. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the character SIG of "button PUSH!" Is continuously displayed directly above the ball removal operation image EG, while the ball removal operation message is directly below the ball removal operation image EG. EM is displayed. That is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the character SIG of "button PUSH!" That prompts the player to operate the button by displaying characters. As a result, the player can understand and execute the operation instruction of the button operation even when the ball removal suggestion display effect is performed. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is displayed by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters "please remove the ball" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the ball removal suggestion display erasing effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball removal suggestion display erasure effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM shown in FIG. 118 (D) are deleted at the same time, and the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a. The character SIG of "button PUSH!" Is not displayed. This suggests that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball removal suggestion display effect is performed for a predetermined time. Further, the message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed in the display area of the button image BOG. This "OK!" Message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 was operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (mission success). Further, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM were deleted because the player operated the operation lever to remove the ball, and as a result, the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) was deleted. This is due to the fact that the tank is full. If the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is not fully filled, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are unconditionally filled until the full tank is cleared. It will continue to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 118 (A) was a jackpot as a result of the effects of FIGS. 118 (B) to 118 (E). In this example, "777" is shown as this jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 118 (F) is not always performed even when the message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 118 (E). , There is a possibility that it will be lost with a predetermined probability.

That is, in the error display effect C shown in FIG. 118, the storage of the game balls in the storage device (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and the effect is being displayed (button effect in the effect display). In the case of), a display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and a ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, in the ball removal suggestion display, the ball removal operation image EG indicating the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located is displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a so as to cover the entire button image BOG, and the ball removal operation is performed. The ball removal operation message EM prompted by character display is displayed directly below the ball removal operation image EG. On the other hand, the character SIG of "button PUSH!" That prompts the player to operate the button by displaying characters is continuously displayed directly above the ball removal operation image EG. That is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect, the player is informed of the button operation. The ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the character SIG of "button PUSH!" Prompted by the display.

[Error display effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect D.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 119 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, as a result of variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 119 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. It shows the situation. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". In addition, the characters "reach!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 119 (A) was a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 116 (B). In this example, this jackpot symbol array is usually shown as a jackpot "888". In addition, the characters "Big hit!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), a round game display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a round game is performed, and the round game display effect is an effect including a display related to this round game. As shown in FIG. 119 (D), in the round game display effect, the round game effect is developed in the center of the display screen 7a, and in the lower left of the screen, the round display RS indicating the number of rounds and the number of balls in the jackpot are displayed. The number of balls to be displayed TD is displayed. In this example, the round display RS shows 8 rounds, and the number of balls output TD shows 1250. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, a second decorative symbol ZH indicating the current jackpot symbol arrangement (“888”) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), on the display screen 7a, a promotion battle effect (promotion effect) of whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to the probabilistic jackpot is executed. This promotion battle effect is performed as a round game effect developed in the center of the display screen 7a shown in FIG. 119 (D). When the round game of 8 rounds is started, an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side battle is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the jackpot promotion suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot promotion suggestion effect, the characters "victory!" Indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and the characters "victory!" By displaying the characters "victory!", It is possible to make the player think that the normal jackpot is promoted to the probabilistic jackpot (a privilege advantageous to the player is given). In this jackpot promotion suggestion effect, the round display RS shows 12 rounds, and the number of balls output TD shows 1870. That is, the promotion battle effect shown in FIG. 119 (E) is performed from 8 rounds to 12 rounds. Further, the second decorative symbol ZH shows the probability variation jackpot symbol array "777". In other words, the second decorative symbol ZH, along with the characters "Victory!", Suggests that the normal jackpot is promoted to a probabilistic jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), the ball removal suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal suggestion display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is full. The ball-pulling suggestion display effect includes a ball-pulling operation image EG including a display suggesting the position of the operation lever for ball-pulling in the game machine, and a ball-pulling operation message EM that prompts the player to perform the ball-pulling operation by displaying characters. , Displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed in front of the jackpot promotion suggestion effect shown in FIG. 119 (F), and the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM completely cover the characters "victory!" In addition, it is displayed so as to cover a part of the round display RS and the number of balls displayed TD (the number part of the round display RS and the number of balls displayed TD). That is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as to cover a part or all of the predetermined character display displayed in the round game effect. In the ball removal operation image EG, an image explaining the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is displayed by enclosing it in a circle SC and indicated by an arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters "Please remove the ball" are displayed on the lower edge of the frame of the ball removal operation image EG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion confirmed production shows that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot in the round game production. Therefore, the display screen 7a shows "777" of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array, and the characters "promotion!" Are displayed above the "777" of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array. With this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the player is convinced that the normal jackpot has been promoted to a probabilistic jackpot. Further, in this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are not displayed, but this is because the player operates the operation lever to operate the ball before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed. As a result of pulling out, the full tank of the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) was eliminated. If the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is not fully filled before the jackpot promotion confirmation effect is performed, the ball removal operation message EM will continue to be displayed even during the jackpot promotion confirmation effect. .. Further, in this jackpot promotion confirmation effect, the round display RS shows 13 rounds, and the number of balls output TD shows 2025. That is, the ball removal suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 119 (G) is performed from 12 rounds to 13 rounds. Further, the second decorative symbol ZH shows the same probability variation jackpot symbol arrangement "777" as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
It should be noted that the jackpot promotion confirmation effect shown in FIG. 119 (H) must be performed even when the character "victory!" Shown in FIG. 119 (F) is displayed (the ally character CRA wins). There is a certain probability that a normal jackpot will not be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot.

That is, in the error display effect D shown in FIG. 119, the storage of the game balls in the storage device (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and the effect is being displayed (big hit game in the effect display). In the case where the effect including the display related to the round game in the middle is performed), the display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and the ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, the ball removal suggestion display is a part of a predetermined character display (round display RS and ball ejection number display) displayed in the round game effect by displaying the ball removal operation image EG indicating the position where the operation lever for removing the ball is located. The ball removal operation message EM, which is displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen 7a so as to cover TD) or all (characters of "victory!") And prompts the ball removal operation by character display, is displayed in the display area of the ball removal operation image EG. It is designed to be displayed in.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the error display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, the first effect is an effect including a display related to the effect button, and the second effect is an effect including a display related to an error. , The display of the second effect is displayed on the front side of the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the display related to the effect button is covered with the display related to the error. According to this configuration, when an error (abnormality) occurs in the game machine, even if the button effect, which is an important effect for the game, is displayed, a part or all of the display related to the effect button is displayed. By covering the above with a display related to the error, it is possible to promptly notify the outside that an error has occurred in a conspicuous manner. As a result, it is possible to quickly deal with the error and reduce the hindrance to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the first effect is an effect including a display related to the round game during the jackpot game, and the display related to the round game includes a predetermined character display. The display of the second effect is displayed on the front side of the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is covered with the display related to the error. According to this configuration, even if a predetermined character display related to the round game, which is an important effect for the game, is produced, a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is set as an error. By covering with a related display, it is possible to promptly notify the outside that an error has occurred in a conspicuous manner. As a result, it is possible to quickly deal with the error and reduce the hindrance to the game as much as possible, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is configured to be a display related to ball removal when a full dish is detected. According to this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the outside that a dish full tank error has occurred in a conspicuous manner. As a result, the player can quickly remove the ball and avoid obstacles to the game, such as interruption of the game due to jamming, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to ball removal includes a message prompting ball removal and an image showing the position of the ball removal operation unit (operation lever or operation button). Is also displayed. According to this configuration, the player can instantly determine the position of the ball removal operation unit and quickly perform ball removal. As a result, the player can avoid obstacles to the game as much as possible, such as interruption of the game due to jamming, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to ball removal is configured to be displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen. According to this configuration, since the display related to ball removal is displayed at a prominent position, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the player from overlooking the display related to ball removal. As a result, the player can surely remove the ball, and can avoid obstacles to the game as much as possible, such as interruption of the game due to jamming. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the error display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the image display device 7 is composed of one display screen 7a, and on the one display screen 7a, a display related to an error is displayed as an effect button. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the display related to the above and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game are displayed on the front side. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and the display related to the error is related to the effect button on the first display screen. The display and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game may be displayed on the second display screen, respectively. In this way, the display related to the error is displayed closer to the player, and the player can be strongly appealed in an extremely impactful manner. An image display device having a first display screen and a second display screen may be configured to be capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D). By doing so, it is possible to further appeal to the player by displaying the display related to the error in 3D.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the dish full tank error is such that a message prompting ball removal and an image showing the position of the ball removal operation unit are displayed together. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to displaying these messages prompting ball removal and an image showing the position of the ball removal operation unit, a voice prompting ball removal may be generated. Alternatively, an image display indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit and a voice prompting the ball removal may be generated, and the message prompting the ball removal may be omitted.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is displayed on the front side of the display related to the effect button and the display related to the round game during the jackpot game. The present invention is not limited to this, although a part or all of the indication of is covered. For example, the error-related display may cover part or all of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may cover part or all of the hold icon display. ..

[Modification example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error shows the display related to the dish full tank error, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the full plate error, the errors include abnormal winning error, door opening error, payout status error, switch error error, magnet detection error, discharge error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball confirmation error, solenoid photo sensor error, An impact detection error, an abnormal V winning error, a winning frequency abnormal error, and the like may be mentioned, and a display related to these errors may be performed.
[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the plate full tank error is a target display such as a display related to the effect button or a display related to the round game during the jackpot game. Although the display is displayed on the front side to cover a part or all of those displays, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display related to the error should be displayed by determining the content of the error and determining whether to cover a part of the target display or the entire display according to the type of the determined error. It may be. Further, the display related to the error may not cover the target display at all depending on the type of the determined error.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects.
The first effect is an effect including a display related to the effect button.
The second effect is an effect including a display related to an error.
The display means may display the display of the second effect on the front side of the display of the first effect, and may cover a part or all of the display related to the effect button with a display related to the error. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C3-2]
The first effect is an effect including a display related to a round game during a jackpot game, instead of an effect including a display related to the effect button.
The display related to the round game includes a predetermined character display.
The display means displays the display of the second effect on the front side of the display of the first effect, and displays a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game as a display related to the error. May cover,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
[Aspect C3-3]
The display related to the error is a display related to ball removal when a full dish is detected.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
[Aspect C3-4]
The display related to ball removal includes a message prompting ball removal and an image showing the position of the ball removal operation unit.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-3.
[Aspect C3-5]
The display related to the ball removal is displayed in the center of the left and right of the display screen.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-3 or the aspect C3-4.

The predetermined information display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. This predetermined information display effect can be executed during a standby, a variable effect of a decorative pattern, a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a predetermined information display effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Predetermined information display effect A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined information display effect A.
In the predetermined information display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), the standby display effect is executed. This standby display production is a production performed during the standby while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration production (demo production). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is often used in the effect of the game machine 1 and is the main character (main character), which is the motif of the game machine 1, and the balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the game machine 1, in other words, the character CRA is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made on the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 120 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-handed hit, a display showing the current number of rounds, a display showing the winning balls, and the like are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), a warning effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, the immersive alerting image C43 is displayed. This immersive caution image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness in the game. In the immersive attention alert image C43, a description such as "let's be careful about immersiveness in the game" may be provided to directly alert the immersiveness in the game.

[Predetermined information display effect B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined information display effect B.
In the predetermined information display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), the standby display effect is executed. This standby display production is a production performed during the standby while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration production (demo production). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is often used in the effect of the game machine 1 and is the main character (main character), which is the motif of the game machine 1, and the balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the game machine 1, in other words, the character CRA is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made on the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 121 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-handed hit, a display showing the current number of rounds, a display showing the winning balls, and the like are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, the maker logo image C44 is displayed. The maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the game machine 1. In the manufacturer logo image C44, "XYZ" is represented as a manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase "Happiness for you !!" is displayed on the maker logo image C44. The maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing the maker who has researched and developed the game machine 1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), a warning effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, the immersive alerting image C43 is displayed. This immersive caution image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness in the game. In the immersive attention alert image C43, a description such as "let's be careful about immersiveness in the game" may be provided to directly alert the immersiveness in the game. In addition, in this alerting effect, a display (beware of forgotten items and theft !!) is also displayed to alert the player to be careful of things left behind or stolen.

[Predetermined information display effect C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined information display effect C.
In the predetermined information display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), the standby display effect is executed. This standby display production is a production performed during the standby while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration production (demo production). In this standby effect, the character CRA, which is often used in the effect of the game machine 1 and is the main character (main character), which is the motif of the game machine 1, and the balloon image C41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, suggesting that the character CRA is the main character in the game machine 1, in other words, the character CRA is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made on the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 122 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-handed hit, a display showing the current number of rounds, a display showing the winning balls, and the like are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, the character CRA and the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the motif of the game machine 1 and is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, the maker logo image C44 is displayed. The maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the game machine 1. In the manufacturer logo image C44, "XYZ" is represented as a manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase "Happiness for you !!" is displayed on the maker logo image C44. The maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing the maker who has researched and developed the game machine 1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), a warning effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, a immersive alerting image C43 and a predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. This immersive caution image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness in the game. In the immersive attention alert image C43, a description such as "let's be careful about immersiveness in the game" may be provided to directly alert the immersiveness in the game. In addition, the predetermined caution image C49 is described as "Be careful of forgetting to take the prepaid card, theft, or the forgotten item", and alerts the player to be careful about forgetting to take the prepaid card, theft, or the forgotten item. It is a display to be displayed.

[Predetermined information display effect D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect D.
In the predetermined information display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the standby display effect is executed. This standby display production is a production performed during the standby while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration production (demo production). In this standby production, it is often used in the production of the game machine 1, and is the main character (main character). In other words, the character CRA, which is the motif of the game machine 1, the minor warning image C46, and fraud suppression. The alert C47, the fraudulent alert C48, and the immersive alert C410 are displayed. The minor warning image C46 is described as "Do not hit if you are under 18 years old!", And is a display that alerts the player not to play a game by a minor under 18 years old. The cheating suppression warning C47 is described as "cheating is a crime. Stop it!", And is a display that warns the player to stop cheating because cheating such as goto is a crime. The fraudulent act warning C48 is described as "Beware of fraud!" And is a display that alerts the player not to match the fraudulent act. The immersive attention alert C410 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness in the game. In the immersive caution image C410, a description such as "Be careful about immersing yourself in the game" may be provided to directly urge attention to the immersive game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the jackpot game display effect is executed. This jackpot game display effect is an effect performed during the jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, the character CRA and the balloon image C42 are displayed. A display suggesting a round is made on the balloon image C42. In the example of FIG. 123 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In addition, in the jackpot game display effect, a display suggesting a right-handed hit, a display showing the current number of rounds, a display showing the winning balls, and the like are also performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), the copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, the character CRA and the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 is a logo representing the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the motif of the game machine 1 and is the main character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the maker logo effect is executed. This maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, the maker logo image C44 is displayed. The maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the game machine 1. In the manufacturer logo image C44, "XYZ" is represented as a manufacturer. In addition, a predetermined catchphrase "Happiness for you !!" is displayed on the maker logo image C44. The maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing the maker who has researched and developed the game machine 1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), a warning effect is executed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the variable effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, a immersive alerting image C43 and a predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. This immersive caution image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the immersiveness in the game. In the immersive attention alert image C43, a description such as "let's be careful about immersiveness in the game" may be provided to directly alert the immersiveness in the game. In addition, the predetermined caution image C49 is described as "Be careful of forgetting to take the prepaid card, theft, or the forgotten item", and alerts the player to be careful about forgetting to take the prepaid card, theft, or the forgotten item. It is a display to be displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the predetermined information display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the predetermined information effects A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the standby display effect is performed, then the jackpot game display effect is performed, and then the display of the immersive caution image C43 starts to change the special symbol. It is done before. According to this configuration, the immersive caution image C43 is displayed at the timing when the player can take a break and calm down after the big hit game, so that the player can take the content of the immersive caution image C43 with a sincere feeling. It is possible to suppress excessive devotion to the game. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the predetermined information effects B to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot game display effect is performed, then the maker logo display effect (display of the maker logo image C44) is performed, and then the immersive caution image. This is done before the display of C43. According to this configuration, the maker logo image C44 and the immersive caution image C43 are performed at the timing when the player can take a break and calm down after the big hit game. Therefore, the player can use the maker 1 Can firmly recognize the manufacturer. As a result, the player can identify the manufacturer that manufactures the game machine 1 that gently snuggles up to the player who performs the immersive attention alert image C43, and the evaluation of the manufacturer of the game machine 1 by the player can be improved. .. As a result, the player can play the game machine 1 created by the manufacturer corresponding to the maker logo image C44 in a familiar manner, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the predetermined information effects C and D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot game display effect is performed, and then the copyright holder display effect (display of the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45) is performed, and then, It is performed before the display of the immersive caution image C43. According to this configuration, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 and the immersive caution image C43 are performed at the timing when the player can take a break and calm down after the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can play the game in addition to the immersive caution image C43. The copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the motif of the machine 1, can be firmly recognized. As a result, a player who knows the copyright holder of the character CRA can play the game machine 1 in a friendly manner, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the predetermined information effect D of the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the immersive attention alert image C410 is displayed in the standby display effect. According to this configuration, since the immersive caution image C43 is displayed when the player is in a relaxed state during standby, the player can deeply accept the content of the immersive caution image C43 and is excessively absorbed in the game. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the predetermined information effect D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the immersive caution image C43 is displayed, the predetermined caution image C49 (the warning display for forgetting to remove the prepaid card, theft, or the forgotten item) is performed. .. According to this configuration, the predetermined caution image C49 is displayed together with the immersive caution image C43 at the timing when the player can take a break and calm down after the big hit game, so that the player can confirm that he / she has forgotten to remove the prepaid card. You can pay attention to theft and make sure you have nothing left behind. As a result, the game can be enjoyed soundly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the predetermined information display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the predetermined information production of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the caution production, in addition to the immersive caution image C43, other images (for example, the maker logo image C44, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, and the minor warning image C46). , Fraudulent act suppression alert C47, fraudulent act alerting C48) may be displayed together.
In addition, during the jackpot game, the immersive caution image C43, the maker logo image C44, the maker logo image C44, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, the minor warning image C46, the fraud suppression warning C47, and the fraudulent behavior warning C48. , A predetermined caution image C49 or the like may be displayed.
In addition, in the maker logo display production, along with the maker logo image C44, other images (for example, immersive attention alert image C43, copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, underage alert image C46, fraud suppression alert alert C47, fraudulent act The attention alert C48 and the predetermined alert image C49) may be displayed together.
In addition, in the copyright holder display production, along with the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, other images (for example, immersive attention alert image C43, maker logo image C44, minor alert image C46, fraud suppression alert alert C47, fraud) The action alert C48 and the predetermined alert image C49) may be displayed together.
Further, in the standby display effect, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, the maker logo image C44, and the predetermined caution image C49 may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined information effect D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the devoted attention alert image C410 of the standby display effect and the devoted attention alert image C43 of the alert effect are described differently as long as they do not deviate from the purpose of devoted attention. You may try to do it. For example, "Let's be careful about the immersiveness of the game!" Is described in the immersive caution image C410 of the standby display effect, and "You are too absorbed in the game and cannot see the surroundings" in the immersive attention alert image C43 of the alert effect. Isn't it? The game is something that you enjoy moderately. Please be careful! "
Further, although the display position of the immersive attention alert image C410 of the standby display effect and the display position of the immersive attention alert image C43 of the attention alert effect are different positions, they may be at the same position.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a standby display.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the jackpot game during the jackpot game.
The third display effect is an effect of performing the first immersive attention alert display that alerts the player to the game.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the combination effect is performed. The third display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying the manufacturer logo representing the manufacturer of the game machine.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a logo representing the copyright holder of a predetermined character used in the game machine.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3.
The first display effect includes a second immersive attention alert display that alerts the player to the immersive game.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect that alerts the user to forget to remove the prepaid card.
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect, and may include the sixth display effect.
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is executed when the third display effect is being performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold icon movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. This hold icon movement effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, before and after the variable effect, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon movement effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon movement effect A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect A. Of the hold icon movement effects A, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) are executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the hold icon movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the normal state. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a hold image display area capable of displaying the hold icon 9A, and here, is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first region FA may be configured so that the region can be identified by an image (region image) showing the region represented by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which the region cannot be distinguished from other regions. Here, the first region FA is in a mode that cannot be distinguished from other regions. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed and its surroundings. In FIG. 124 (A), of the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1, the second hold icon 9A from the bottom (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is pre-read. The hold has changed. The pending digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 124 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 124 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four vertically arranged hold icons 9A is displayed first. The hold icon 9A at the bottom (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (hold images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9A displayed first among the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). However, the hold has changed due to look-ahead.

As shown in FIG. 124 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three vertically arranged hold icons 9A in FIG. 124 (D). , The hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed first moves to the right. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A is changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and the hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 124 (D), of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9A, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts downward. Then, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is newly overlapped with a part of the first hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). Is displayed.

124 (F) to 124 (J) are executed when the gaming state is the probability change state. In FIG. 124 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at the time of probability change. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9B are hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from the bottom to the top. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a hold image display area on which the hold icon 9B can be displayed, and here, it is an area having a predetermined width from the right end of the display screen 7a. The second region SA may be configured so that the region can be identified by an image (region image) showing the region represented by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which the region cannot be distinguished from other regions. Here, the second region SA is in a mode that cannot be distinguished from other regions. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed and its surroundings. In FIG. 124 (F), of the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the bottom (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is pre-read. The hold has changed. The pending digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 124 (G) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B is added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9B is newly added to the top of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9B. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 124 (H), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the first displayed hold among the four vertically arranged hold icons 9B is displayed. The icon 9B (holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b) moves to the left and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (hold images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (I), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold has changed due to look-ahead.

As shown in FIG. 124 (J), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three vertically arranged hold icons 9B in FIG. 124 (I). , The hold icon 9B displayed first (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves to the left. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B is changed by the look-ahead, the display does not disappear even after moving to the left, and the hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 124 (I), of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9B, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts downward. Then, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is newly overlapped with a part of the first hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). Is displayed.

[Hold icon movement effect B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect B. The hold icon movement effect B is different from the hold icon movement effect A in the changing direction of the decorative symbol and the arrangement direction of the hold icon. Of the hold icon movement effects B, FIGS. 125 (A) to 125 (E) are executed when the game state is the normal state. In the hold icon movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the normal state. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from right to left. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a hold image display area capable of displaying the hold icon 9A, and here, is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first region FA may be configured so that the region can be identified by an image (region image) showing the region represented by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which the region cannot be distinguished from other regions. Here, the first region FA is in a mode that cannot be distinguished from other regions. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed and its surroundings. In FIG. 125 (A), of the three hold icons 9A in FIG. 1, the second hold icon 9A from the right (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is pre-read. The hold has changed. The pending digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 125 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A is newly added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 125 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four hold icons 9A arranged side by side is displayed first. The hold icon 9A on the far right (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9A (hold images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed after the second are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of fluctuation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). The first hold icon 9A displayed first among the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). However, the hold has changed due to look-ahead.

As shown in FIG. 125 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side in FIG. 125 (D). , The hold icon 9A displayed first (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A is changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving up, and the hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 125 (D), of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts to the right. Then, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is newly overlapped with a part of the first hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). Is displayed.

FIGS. 125 (F) to 125 (J) are executed when the gaming state is the probability change state. In FIG. 125 (F), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner at the time of probability change. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9B are hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from left to right. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a hold image display area capable of displaying the hold icon 9B, and here, is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The second region SA may be configured so that the region can be identified by an image (region image) showing the region represented by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which the region cannot be distinguished from other regions. Here, the second region SA is in a mode that cannot be distinguished from other regions. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed and its surroundings. In FIG. 125 (F), of the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the left (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is pre-read. The hold has changed. The pending digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 125 (G) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B is added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9B is newly added to the rightmost of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 125 (H), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four hold icons 9B arranged side by side is displayed first. The leftmost hold icon 9B (hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves downward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (hold images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) are on the left. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (I), the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of fluctuation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold has changed due to look-ahead.

As shown in FIG. 125 (J), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side in FIG. 125 (I). , The hold icon 9B displayed first (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves downward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B is changed by pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving down, and the hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 125 (I), of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts to the left. Then, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is newly overlapped with a part of the first hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). Is displayed.

[Hold icon movement effect C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect C. The hold icon movement effect C is different from the hold icon movement effect A in the game state and the display mode of the hold. FIGS. 126 (A) to 126 (J) are executed when the gaming state is a non-probability change time saving state. In the hold icon movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a short time. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, respectively. Will be done. That is, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. Similarly, the three hold icons 9B are the hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from the bottom to the top. The hold icon 9B of the special figure 2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A of the special figure 1. The hold of special figure 2 is preferentially digested (priority digestion) over the hold of special figure 1. Therefore, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the hold icon 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed with the hold icon 9B to be preferentially digested overlapping on the upper side.

The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a hold image display area capable of displaying the hold icons 9A and 9B, and here, it is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first region FA may be configured so that the region can be identified by an image (region image) showing the region represented by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which the region cannot be distinguished from other regions. Here, the first region FA is in a mode that cannot be distinguished from other regions. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icons 9A and 9B are displayed and the surrounding area. In FIG. 126 (A), of the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the bottom (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is pre-read. The hold has changed. The pending digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 126 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B of the special figure 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a new hold icon 9B is newly added to the top of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9B. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 126 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four vertically arranged hold icons 9B is displayed first. The hold icon 9B at the bottom (hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (hold images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold has changed due to look-ahead.

As shown in FIG. 126 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three vertically arranged hold icons 9B in FIG. 126 (D). , The hold icon 9B displayed first (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves to the right. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B is changed by the look-ahead, the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and the hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 126 (D), of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9B, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts downward. Then, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is newly overlapped with a part of the first hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. At this time, a special reach effect or the like may be executed.

When the shift movement of the hold icon 9B is repeated and the last hold icon 9B is digested as shown in FIGS. 126 (G) and 126 (H), as shown in FIG. 126 (I), the special figure 1 Hold digestion of hold icon 9A is started. Here, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9A, the lowest hold icon 9A displayed first ( The reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (hold image 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed.

[Hold icon movement effect D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect D. The hold icon movement effect D is different from the hold icon movement effect A in the game state, the display mode of the hold, the changing direction of the decorative symbol, and the arrangement direction of the hold icon. 127 (A) to 127 (J) are executed when the gaming state is a non-probability change time saving state. In the hold icon movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a short time. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, respectively. Will be done. That is, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from right to left. Similarly, the three hold icons 9B are hold images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b in order from left to right. The hold icon 9B of the special figure 2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A of the special figure 1. The hold of special figure 2 is preferentially digested (priority digestion) over the hold of special figure 1. Therefore, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the hold icon 9B of the special figure 2 are displayed with the hold icon 9B to be preferentially digested overlapping on the upper side.

The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a hold image display area capable of displaying the hold icons 9A and 9B, and here, it is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first region FA may be configured so that the region can be identified by an image (region image) showing the region represented by a specific color, or may be in a mode in which the region cannot be distinguished from other regions. Here, the first region FA is in a mode that cannot be distinguished from other regions. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the hold icons 9A and 9B are displayed and the surrounding area. In FIG. 127 (A), of the three hold icons 9B in FIG. 2, the second hold icon 9B from the right (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) is pre-read. The hold has changed. The pending digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 127 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B of special figure 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9B is newly added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9B is a hold image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 127 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four hold icons 9B arranged side by side is displayed first. The hold icon 9B on the far right (hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (hold images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of fluctuation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special figure 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). However, the hold has changed due to look-ahead.

As shown in FIG. 127 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side in FIG. 127 (D). , The hold icon 9B displayed first (hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b) moves upward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9B is changed by the look-ahead, the display does not disappear even after moving up, and the hold digest image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 127 (D), of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). The reserved image 9B) shifts to the right. Then, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is newly overlapped with a part of the first hold icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. At this time, a special reach effect or the like may be executed.

When the shift movement of the hold icon 9B is repeated and the last hold icon 9B is digested as shown in FIGS. 127 (G) and 127 (H), as shown in FIG. 127 (I), the special figure 1 Hold digestion of hold icon 9A is started. Here, when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the lowest hold icon 9A displayed first among the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side ( The reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (hold image 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in the vertical direction in the first effect (normal time). And, in the second area SA whose position in the left-right direction is different from that of the first area FA, the second effect (at the time of probability change) in which a plurality of hold icons 9B are displayed side by side in the vertical direction is executed. Can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), in the first effect (normal time), the hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A is in the left-right direction. It moves along (to the right), and the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second shift move along the up and down direction (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (H), in the second effect (at the time of probability change), the hold icon 9B displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9B is in the left-right direction. Moving along (to the left), the remaining hold icons 9B displayed after the second are shifted along (downward) along the vertical direction, and FIGS. 124 (C) (E) (H) ( As shown in J), in the first effect (normal time) and the second effect (probability change time), the hold icons 9A and 9B that have moved along the left-right direction may or may not disappear from the display screen 7a. There is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, the plurality of hold icons 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 and the plurality of hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 Are displayed side by side in the vertical direction, and the plurality of hold icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2 are overlapped and displayed on a part of the plurality of hold icons 9A corresponding to the special figure 1. You can perform the production of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the third effect, among the plurality of holding icons 9B corresponding to the special figure 2, the holding icon 9B displayed first is along the left-right direction. Moves (to the right), and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second shift move along the vertical direction (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 and 126, the first effect (normal time), the second effect (at the time of probability change), and the third effect (time reduction) are The game state is different for each. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the hold icon movement effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Of the above-mentioned hold icon movement effects A, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) are executed when the game state is the normal state, and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) show the game state. It is supposed to be executed in the probabilistic state. However, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) and 124 (F) to 124 (J) may be executed in the same gaming state. For example, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) and 124 (F) to 124 (J) may be executed in different effect modes in the same gaming state (for example, normal state). The same applies to the hold icon movement effect B.
[Modification 2]
FIGS. 126 (A) to 126 (J) of FIG. 126 (A) to FIG. However, FIGS. 126 (A) to 126 (J) of the hold icon movement effect C may be executed when the game state is a state other than the non-probability change time saving state. The same applies to the hold icon movement effect D.
[Modification 3]
The effects shown in the hold icon movement effects A to D may all be executed in the same gaming state. For example, the effects shown in the hold icon movement effects A to D may be executed in different effect modes in the same gaming state (for example, normal state).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
In the first area of the display means, a first effect in which a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side in the first direction, and
In a second region where the position in the second direction intersecting the first direction is different from the first region, the plurality of holding icons are displayed side by side along the first direction. A game machine that is characterized by being able to produce and perform.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1.
In the first effect, the first displayed hold icon among the plurality of hold icons moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second move the second and subsequent hold icons. A gaming machine characterized in that it shifts along the direction of 1.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2.
In the second effect, the first displayed hold icon among the plurality of hold icons moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed after the second move the second and subsequent hold icons. Shift along the direction of 1
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect and the second effect, the hold icon moved along the second direction may or may not disappear from the display means.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3.
In the first region of the display means, the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 1 and the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed side by side along the first direction. At the same time, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute a third effect in which a plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2 are superposed on a part of the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 1.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4.
In the third effect, among the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2, the hold icon displayed first moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed in the second and subsequent directions. The hold icon is a gaming machine characterized in that it shifts along the first direction.
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4 or aspect D1-5.
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming state is different between the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect.

The hold icon superimposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. This hold icon superimposition effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, before and after the variable effect, and the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon superimposition effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon superimposition effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposition effect A. The hold icon superimposition effect A is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a at the left end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from bottom to top. In FIG. 128 (A), the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 128 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. Here, the newly added retaining icon 9A has its hold changed due to pre-reading. As shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four vertically arranged hold icons 9A is displayed first. The hold icon 9A in the normal state at the bottom (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (hold images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) corresponding to the fluctuation is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 128 (E), the hold icon displayed first among the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. As the 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a), the preview image PM before the holding change due to the look-ahead is performed is displayed. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, a suggestion image PM suggesting that the hold icon 9A is in the specific state is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the hold icon 9A immediately behind the adjacent image PM. After that, the first image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 128 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the hold icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent hold icon 9A behind it and the hold icon 9A behind it.

As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three vertically arranged hold icons 9A in FIG. 128 (F). , The hold icon 9A displayed first (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves to the right. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A is changed by look-ahead (it is in a specific state), the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and as shown in FIG. 128 (H), the hold digestion image 9C ( It becomes the hold icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 128 (F), of the three vertically arranged hold icons 9A, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts downward as shown in FIG. 128 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a hold digestion image is newly placed on a part of the first hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed overlapping. Further, the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48).

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superimposition effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposition effect B. The hold icon superimposition effect B is different from the hold icon superimposition effect A in the changing direction of the decorative symbol and the arrangement direction of the hold icon. The hold icon superimposition effect B is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The three hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from right to left. In FIG. 129 (A), the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed.

FIG. 129 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. Here, the newly added retaining icon 9A has its hold changed due to pre-reading. As shown in FIG. 129 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four hold icons 9A arranged side by side is displayed first. The rightmost hold icon 9A in the normal state (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserved digestion image 9C is not displayed. Of the four hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9A (hold images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed after the second are on the right. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51). The hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) corresponding to the fluctuation is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 129 (E), the hold icon displayed first among the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. In 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a), the preview image PM before the holding change due to pre-reading is displayed. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, a suggestion image PM suggesting that the hold icon 9A is in the specific state is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the hold icon 9A immediately behind the adjacent image PM. After that, the first image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 129 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the hold icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent hold icon 9A behind it and the hold icon 9A behind it.

As shown in FIG. 129 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, among the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side in FIG. 129 (F). , The hold icon 9A displayed first (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the moved hold icon 9A is changed by look-ahead (it is in a specific state), the display does not disappear even after moving upward, and as shown in FIG. 129 (H), the hold digestion image 9C ( It becomes the hold icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 129 (F), of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining hold icons 9A displayed after the second (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). The reserved image 9A) shifts to the right as shown in FIG. 129 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (H), a hold digestion image is newly formed on a part of the first hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed overlapping. In addition, the following variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51).

Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (I), during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superimposition effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposition effect C. The hold icon superimposition effect C is different from the hold icon superimposition effect A in the display mode of the hold icon 9A and the display mode of the hold icon 9C. The hold icon superimposition effect C is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving downward (along the vertical direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a, and the two hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are above the hold icon 9C and along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. It is displayed side by side. That is, the hold icon 9C and the two hold icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The two hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. Here, the hold icon 9A at the bottom displayed first (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is put into a specific state by pre-reading (hold changes). ing. The first hold icon 9A is displayed so that the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) below it overlaps, and a part of the hold icon 9A is difficult to see. The second hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is displayed so that the first hold icon 9A overlaps, and a part of the hold icon 9A becomes difficult to see. There is.

FIG. 130 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the two hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 130 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), of the two vertically arranged hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A in the lowest specific state displayed first (the first of the first special figure hold storage areas 85a). The hold image 9A) corresponding to one storage area moves downward and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining two hold icons 9A (hold images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) are also shifted downward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). Of the two vertically arranged hold icons 9A during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the newly displayed (first displayed) hold icon As the 9A (holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a), the preview image PM before the holding change due to the look-ahead is performed is displayed. In other words, a suggestion image PM suggesting that the hold change occurs is displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent hold icon 9A immediately behind and a part of the adjacent hold icon 9C immediately before. After that, the first image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 130 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first hold icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the first hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent hold icon 9A one behind and the adjacent hold icon 9C in front.

As shown in FIG. 130 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears and is the first (first displayed). The hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves downward toward the display position of the hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining hold icons 9A (hold images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed in the second and subsequent positions are also shifted downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 130 (H), the first (first displayed) hold icon 9A becomes a new hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. FIG. 130 (H) shows a mode in which the hold icon 9A is newly added while the next variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48).

Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superimposition effect D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon superimposition effect D. Compared with the hold icon superimposition effect A, the hold icon superimposition effect C is different in the variation direction of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon 9C. The hold icon superimposition effect D is executed when the game state is the normal state. In the hold icon superimposition effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are each moving in the left direction (along the left-right direction), so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a, and the two hold icons 9A of the special figure 1 are on the left side of the hold icon 9C along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a. It is displayed side by side. That is, the hold icon 9C and the two hold icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the changing direction of the decorative symbol. The two hold icons 9A are the hold images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a in order from right to left. Here, the rightmost hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed first is in a specific state by pre-reading (hold changes). ing. The first hold icon 9A is displayed so that the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) on the right side overlaps with each other, and a part of the hold icon 9A is difficult to see. The second hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) is displayed so that the first hold icon 9A overlaps, and a part of the hold icon 9A becomes difficult to see. There is.

FIG. 131 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, a new hold icon 9A is added to the leftmost of the two hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added hold icon 9A is a hold image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a. When the hold icon 9A is newly added, the hold icon 9A immediately before (right side) the hold icon 9A to be added moves to the left side once and does not overlap with the hold icon before that. Also, the newly added hold icon 9A does not overlap with the previous hold icon 9A (on the right side).

Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) moves upward. After that, it disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, among the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side, the rightmost hold icon 9A displayed first (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a). Moves to the right and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining two hold icons 9A (hold images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) are also shifted to the right. As a result of this shift movement, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are partially overlapped with the previous and next hold icons. Then, the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the variation may be in the mode of the decorative symbol variation effect D (FIG. 51).

As shown in FIG. 131 (E), during the variable display of the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R, the two reserved icons 9A arranged side by side are newly displayed first. The hold icon 9A (displayed first) (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displays the preview image PM before the hold change due to pre-reading is performed. .. In other words, a suggestion image PM suggesting that the hold change occurs is displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent hold icon 9A immediately behind and a part of the adjacent hold icon 9C immediately before. After that, the first image superimposition display effect shown in FIG. 131 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first hold icon 9A in a specific state and the first image CM are displayed adjacent to the first hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps the hold icon 9A in a specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a part of each of the adjacent hold icon 9A one behind and the adjacent hold icon 9C in front.

As shown in FIG. 131 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, as shown in FIG. 131 (H). The first (first displayed) hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) moves to the right toward the display position of the hold icon 9C. To do. Further, the remaining hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a) displayed second is also shifted to the right. As a result, the first (first displayed) hold icon 9A becomes a new hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. Further, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 131 (I), the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while the next variable display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and moves to the left after being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM. At this time, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon superimposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a first effect in which the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A, and FIG. 128 ( As shown in D), it is possible to execute the second effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed and the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the hold icon 9A may be in a specific state in which it has changed to a specific mode, or may be in a normal state in which it has not changed to a specific mode. As shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons 9A, the first displayed hold icon 9A is in a specific state. As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the hold icon 9A in the specific state moves to a predetermined position and becomes the hold digestion image 9C (the hold icon 9C), as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a plurality of hold icons 9A are held. Of the icons 9C, the hold icon 9C is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 9A displayed second. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), in the second effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed, and among the plurality of hold icons 9A, the first displayed hold icon 9A Is in the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 128 (C), after the hold icon 9A in the normal state moves toward a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), from the display screen 7a. Disappear. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, when the hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A is in the specific state in the first effect, the hold icon 9A in the specific state is set. The first image CM is displayed adjacent to the image CM, and a part of the first image CM covers a part of the hold icon 9A displayed second among the plurality of hold icons 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed side by side in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIG. 128 (G). , Of the plurality of hold icons 9A, the first displayed hold icon 9A moves to the right to become the hold icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 128 (H), 2 of the plurality of hold icons 9A The second displayed hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged along the second direction, and are partially overlapped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), when the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, it is suggested that the hold icon 9A changes to the specific state before changing to the specific state. The suggestion image PM is displayed, and the suggestion image PM covers a part of the other hold icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold icon superimposition effect.
[Modification 1]
The above-mentioned hold icon superimposition effects A to D are assumed to be performed when the game state is normal. However, the above-mentioned hold icon superimposition effects A to D may be performed in a gaming state other than the normal time. For example, the above-mentioned hold icon superimposition effects A to D may be performed at the time of probabilistic change or at the time of non-probable change.
[Modification 2]
In the above-mentioned hold icon superimposition effects A to D, the suggestion image PM is displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state. However, the suggestion image PM may be displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the specific state to the specific state that is more advantageous to the player.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon corresponding to the hold.
The first effect in which the hold icon is superimposed on a part of the hold icon and
A gaming machine characterized in that a second effect in which the hold icon is displayed and the hold icon is not displayed can be executed.
◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
The hold icon may be in a specific state where it has changed to a specific mode, or it may be in a normal state where it has not changed to a specific mode.
In the first effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed, the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons is in the specific state, and the hold icon in the specific state is in a predetermined position. When the hold icon is moved to, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon displayed second among the plurality of hold icons.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2.
In the second effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed, the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons is in the normal state, and the hold icon in the normal state is the predetermined hold icon. A gaming machine characterized in that it disappears from the display means after moving toward a position.
◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2 or aspect D2-3.
In the first effect, when the first displayed hold icon among the plurality of hold icons is in the specific state, a specific image is displayed adjacent to the hold icon in the specific state, and the specific image is displayed. A game machine characterized in that a part of the holding icon covers a part of the holding icon displayed second among the plurality of holding icons.
◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-4.
In the first effect, the plurality of hold icons are displayed side by side along the first direction, and among the plurality of hold icons, the first displayed hold icon moves in the second direction. It becomes a hold icon, and the hold icon displayed second among the plurality of hold icons and the hold icon are arranged along the second direction, and some of them are displayed overlapping. A featured game machine.
◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-5.
When the hold icon changes from the normal state to the specific state, a suggestion image suggesting that the icon changes to the specific state is displayed before changing to the specific state, and the suggestion image is another hold. A game machine characterized by covering a part of the icon.

The reserved special display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. This reserved special display effect can be executed during a variable effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold special display effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold special display effect]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining a hold display pattern 1 and a hold display pattern 2 in the hold special display effect.
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 3 and the hold display pattern 4 in the hold special display effect.
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 5 and the hold display pattern 6 of the hold special display effects.
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern 7 and the hold display pattern 8 in the hold special display effect.
This hold special display effect can be executed in a plurality of hold display patterns. Hereinafter, the hold display patterns 1 to 8 will be described. The hold display patterns 1 to 8 are effects performed by the same fluctuation from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) to the stop display.

[Hold display pattern 1]
In the hold display pattern 1, first, as shown in FIG. 132A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (C), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect and the time of the reach effect 1. In this reach effect 2, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.
In this hold display pattern 1, the mode of hold display does not change.

[Hold display pattern 2]
In the hold display pattern 2, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (D), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (F), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are in different positions as compared with the reach effect 1. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are moved from the lower left position of the display screen 7a to the upper right position, and are arranged diagonally with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the shape, color, or pattern is the same as at the reach effect 1 o'clock. In this reach effect 2, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.
This hold display pattern 2 is a mode in which the position changes among the modes of hold display.

[Hold display pattern 3]
In the hold display pattern 3, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (C), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in two places. One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as at 1 o'clock of the reach effect. The other place (also referred to as the second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a place (position) different from that at the time of reach production 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in different places as compared with the reach production 1 are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a and diagonally with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Placed in. In the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the shape, color, or pattern is the same as that at the reach effect 1 o'clock. In this reach effect 3, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.
In the hold display pattern 3, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in one place are positioned in the hold display mode. It is a changing aspect.

[Hold display pattern 4]
In the hold display pattern 4, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (D), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are different in color and pattern from those at the time of reach production 1, and are changed to a crosshatch pattern in red. In this reach effect 4, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.
The hold display pattern 4 is a mode in which the color and the pattern change among the modes of the hold display.

[Hold display pattern 5]
In the hold display pattern 5, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have different shapes as compared with the reach effect 1, and are changed to a star shape. In this reach effect 5, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.
The hold display pattern 5 is a mode in which the shape of the hold display changes.

[Hold display pattern 6]
In the hold display pattern 6, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as at 1 o'clock of the reach effect. The other place (also referred to as the second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a place (position) different from that at the time of reach production 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place have different colors and patterns as compared with the reach effect of 1 o'clock, and are changed to a red crosshatch pattern. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in the second place are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, are arranged diagonally with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and reach. The shape is different from that at the time of production 1, and it has changed to a star shape. In this reach effect 6, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.

In the hold display pattern 6, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are the colors and the hold display modes. The pattern changes, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed at the second place change the position and shape of the hold display modes.

[Hold display pattern 7]
In the hold display pattern 7, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from that of the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are different in position, shape, color, and pattern as compared with the reach effect 1. .. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are moved from the lower left position of the display screen 7a to the upper right position, and are arranged diagonally with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B have different shapes and change to a star shape as compared with the reach effect 1 o'clock, and the colors and patterns are different and change to a red crosshatch pattern. .. In this reach effect 7, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.
The hold display pattern 7 is a mode in which the position, shape, color, and pattern of the hold display are changed.

[Hold display pattern 8]
In the hold display pattern 8, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started. Further, in the fluctuation start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel with the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), the reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that at the time of the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), the reach effect 2 is executed. In this reach effect 2, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the ally character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1 o'clock. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as at 1 o'clock of the reach effect. The other place (also referred to as the second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a place (position) different from that at the time of reach production 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are displayed in the same manner as at the reach effect 1 o'clock. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in the second place are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, are arranged diagonally with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and reach. The shape is different from that at the time of production 1, and it has changed to a star shape. In this reach effect 8, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect of 1 o'clock.
In the hold display pattern 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously arranged in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place have no change in the hold display mode. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed at the second place are modes in which the position and shape of the hold icon 9C change.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold special display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, as the display of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the hold display at the time of reach effect 1 (hereinafter, reach effect 1 o'clock). (Also referred to as hold display) and hold display at the time of reach effect 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as hold display at 2 o'clock of reach effect) are performed. According to this configuration, since the hold display mode is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the hold display and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6 and 8, in the reach effect 2, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place and the hold icon 9C are placed in the second place. The displayed hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the same time. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold display, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the hold display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, 7, and 8, in the reach effect 1, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in the first place and reach. In the effect 2, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the second place. According to this configuration, since the position of the hold display is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the hold display and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 5 to 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a circular shape in the reach effect 1, and the hold icon 9C is displayed in a circular shape in the reach effect 2. The icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, since the shape of the hold display is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the hold display and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the reserved special display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, a chance-up effect using the hold icon 9A and / or the hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2 may be performed. According to this configuration, since the hold display and the chance-up effect can be combined, it is possible to provide an interesting effect without wasting the display screen 7a.
For example, in the hold display pattern 2, the look-ahead effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and the look-ahead result may be displayed by changing the shape, color, and pattern of the hold display. In this case, for example, when the result of the look-ahead (preliminary determination) is a big hit, the color of the hold icon 9A to be read-ahead is changed from white to red.
Further, in the hold display pattern 2, a look-ahead effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and a predetermined display representing the look-ahead result may be displayed in association with the hold display. In this case, for example, when the result of the look-ahead (preliminary determination) is a big hit, the timer display or a predetermined chance-up character (such as super hot) may be associated with the hold icon 9A to be read ahead.

[Modification 2]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold icon 9A and / or the hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2 are used to indicate the number of times of the predetermined effect. You may try to do. According to this configuration, since the hold display and the effect number suggestion effect can be used together, it is possible to provide an interesting effect without wasting the display screen 7a.
For example, in the reach effect 2 of the hold display pattern 2, each time a pseudo continuous effect is performed, one color of the hold icon 9A in the second place may be changed to indicate the number of pseudo continuous effects. In this case, when the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times, three icons (for example, red) having a color different from white among the hold icons 9A and one white icon are displayed. In this case, when the variation in which the hold display pattern 2 is performed ends, the hold display may return to the original white color.
In addition, the above-mentioned modification 1 and modification 2 may be combined to perform a chance-up effect and an effect number suggestion effect using the hold display.

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 1 to 8, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon are held. A hold display different from 9C may be additionally provided. For example, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A, a hold display represented by a number may be added. The added hold display represents the same number of holds as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of hold icons 9A is four (the number of holds is four), the added hold display is represented as "4".
For example, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A, a hold display represented by a symbol may be additionally provided. The added hold display represents the same number of holds as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of hold icons 9A is four (the number of holds is four), the added hold display is represented by a symbol representing "4".

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold display mode changes in the reach effect 2, but the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, You only have to change at least one of the hold icon patterns. Further, the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, and the pattern of the hold icon may be combined to change the hold display mode.

[Modification example 4]
In the hold special display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2, 3, 6 to 8, the hold display moves to the upper left in the reach effect 2, but moves to the lower left, upper right, and center. You may. That is, when the hold display moves from the state of the reach effect 1 to the state of the reach effect 2, it may be moved to a different position.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing the first hold display form effect of displaying the display form of the hold display in the first form.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second hold display form effect that displays the display form of the hold display in a second form different from the first form.
The first hold display pattern may be selected as one display pattern among the plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display.
A second hold display pattern may be selected as one display pattern among the plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display.
In the same fluctuation, when the hold display is performed, one of the plurality of display patterns is selected and displayed.
The first hold display pattern is a pattern in which the first display effect is performed.
The second hold display pattern is a pattern in which the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1.
In the second hold display pattern, when the second display effect is performed, the first display effect may also be performed at the same time.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
The hold display of the first form is located at the first position.
The hold display of the second form is located at a second position different from the first position.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3.
The hold display of the first form has a shape of the first shape.
The hold display of the second form is a second shape whose shape is different from that of the first shape.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4.
In the second display effect, a chance-up effect using the hold display in the second form is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5.
In the second display effect, the effect number suggestion effect indicating the number of times of a predetermined effect is performed using the hold display in the second form.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation means image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. This operation means image display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation means image display effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is output from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Operation means image display effect A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect A. The operation means image display effect A is executed, for example, in accordance with a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4, a meter image PL, and a sword image VI are displayed. In FIG. 136 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is difficult to see. The mode that is difficult to see includes a case where the display is not displayed, a case where the display is small, a case where the display is faint, and the like. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed at each vertex of the rectangular shape on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. Here, "1300" is described in the lower left of the meter image PL, indicating that when the number of points reaches 1300, the part of a specific color inside disappears. The sword image VI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, which is displayed translucently here. As shown in FIG. 136 (B), the four button images BN1 to BN4 change to other colors at regular intervals, and perform an effect simulating the mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), the button image BN4 on the upper right disappears first, and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the point number PN of "150" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "100" displayed earlier. Will be done. In addition, the sword image VI changes in response to repeated pressing operations of the effect button 63. Here, it changes to another color so as to represent the mode in which the inside of the sword image VI is emitting light.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the lower right button image BN3 disappears and the point number PN of "200" is displayed. .. When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the point number PN of "250" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "200" displayed earlier. Will be done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the lower left button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of "300" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 136 (F). When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the point number PN of "330" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "300" displayed earlier. Will be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears and the number of points PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), the sword image ASI, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, and here, the translucent sword image VI becomes darker to become the sword image ASI. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB showing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "push in !!!".

When the sword member 64 is pushed in by the player, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 136 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 136 (C) to 136 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented at high speed from the digital value 0 is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the definite display TPD showing the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total points is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after the confirmation display TPD of the total point "1330" is displayed, the area of the specific color part inside the meter image PL is reduced and remains. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), the achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the characters "CLEAR!" Are displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Operation means image display effect B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect B. The number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a of the operation means image display effect B is different from that of the operation means image display effect A. The operation means image display effect B is executed, for example, in accordance with a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), three button images BN1 to BN3 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 137 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is difficult to see. The mode that is difficult to see includes a case where the display is not displayed, a case where the display is small, a case where the display is faint, and the like. Each of the three button images BN1 to BN3 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed at each of the triangular vertices on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the three button images BN1 to BN3 change to other colors at regular intervals, and perform an effect simulating the mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (C), the button image BN3 on the upper center disappears first, and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), the point number PN of "150" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "100" displayed earlier. Will be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (E), the lower right button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of "200" is displayed. .. When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, the point number PN of "250" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "200" displayed earlier. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the lower left button image BN1 disappears and the point number PN of "300" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 137 (F). When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, the point number PN of "330" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "300" displayed earlier.

Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), the sword image ASI, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB showing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "push in !!!".

When the sword member 64 is pushed in by the player, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 137 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 137 (C) to 137 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented at high speed from the digital value 0 is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the definite display TPD showing the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total points is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after the confirmation display TPD of the total point "1330" is displayed, the area of the specific color part inside the meter image PL is reduced and remains. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), the achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the characters "CLEAR!" Are displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Operation means image display effect C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect C. The operation means image display effect C is different from the operation means image display effect A in that the enlarged button image BBN is displayed instead of the sword image ASI in FIG. 138 (G). The operation means image display effect C is executed, for example, in accordance with a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 138 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is difficult to see. The mode that is difficult to see includes a case where the display is not displayed, a case where the display is small, a case where the display is faint, and the like. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed at each vertex of the rectangular shape on the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. Here, "1300" is described in the lower left of the meter image PL, indicating that when the number of points reaches 1300, the part of a specific color inside disappears. As shown in FIG. 138 (B), the four button images BN1 to BN4 change to other colors at regular intervals, and perform an effect imitating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light.

When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (C), the button image BN4 on the upper right disappears first, and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), the point number PN of "150" is further displayed so as to overlap with the previously displayed "100" point number PN. Will be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the lower right button image BN3 disappears and the point number PN of "200" is displayed. .. When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the point number PN of "250" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "200" displayed earlier. Will be done. Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the lower left button image BN2 disappears and the point number PN of "300" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 138 (F). When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the point number PN of "330" is further displayed so as to overlap the display of the point number PN of "300" displayed earlier. Will be done.

Further, when the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, the upper left button image BN1 disappears and the number of points PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), the enlarged button image BBN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The enlarged button image BBN represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button image BN. The enlarged button image BBN and the button image BN represent the same appearance of the effect button 63, but the shapes may be the same or different. The timer bar TBI indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI overlaps the magnifying button image BBN and is displayed in front of the magnifying button image BBN. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and is displayed here as "press !!!!".

When the sword member 64 is pushed in by the player, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 138 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 138 (C) to 138 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented at high speed from the digital value 0 is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the definite display TPD showing the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total points is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after the confirmation display TPD of the total point "1330" is displayed, the area of the specific color part inside the meter image PL is reduced and remains. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), the achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the characters "CLEAR!" Are displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Operation means image display effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the operation means image display effect D. Compared with the operation means image display effect A, the operation means image display effect D has a different order of increasing or decreasing the number of button image BNs displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation means image display effect D is executed, for example, in accordance with a battle effect at the time of probability change. In the operation means image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), one button image BN1 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 139 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is difficult to see. The mode that is difficult to see includes a case where the display is not displayed, a case where the display is small, a case where the display is faint, and the like. The button image BN1 represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining amount of points can be known by changing the area of a specific color portion inside. Here, "1300" is described in the lower left of the meter image PL, indicating that when the number of points reaches 1300, the part of a specific color inside disappears. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the button image BN1 changes to another color at regular intervals, and performs an effect imitating a mode in which the effect button 63 emits light. When the player repeatedly presses down the effect button 63, a point number PN of "100" is displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139 (B).

When the player further repeats the pressing operation of the effect button 63, the button image BN2 is newly displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139 (C). Further, the number of points PN of "100" or "150" is displayed on the right side of the button image BN2. When the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, the button image BN3 is newly displayed on the right side of the button image BN2 as shown in FIG. 139 (D). Further, the point number PN of "200" or "250" is displayed above the button image BN3. Further, when the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 139 (E), a new button image BN4 is displayed below the button image BN3.

Further, when the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), the four button images BN1 to BN4 disappear from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), the sword image ASI, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB showing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI overlaps the sword image ASI and is displayed in front of the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "push in !!!".

When the sword member 64 is pushed in by the player, the total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 139 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIGS. 136 (C) to 136 (F) is displayed, the increment display MTP in which the numerical value is incremented at high speed from the digital value 0 is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the definite display TPD showing the total points "1330" is displayed. Then, an effect of reducing the remaining amount of the meter image PL by the amount corresponding to the total points is executed. Since the remaining amount of the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, here, after the confirmation display TPD of the total point "1330" is displayed, the area of the specific color part inside the meter image PL is reduced and remains. A production that runs out of quantity is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), the achievement image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, the characters "CLEAR!" Are displayed on the achieved image ACV.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 (A) and 138 (A), a first effect in which a plurality of button images BN1 to BN4 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and FIG. 136 ( C), as shown in FIG. 138 (C), a second effect in which a smaller number of button images BN1 to BN3 are displayed than the number of button images BN1 to BN4 displayed in the first effect, and FIG. 136. (F), as shown in FIG. 138 (F), a third effect in which a smaller number of button images BN1 than the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect is displayed is executed. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 (E) and 138 (E), the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect is smaller than the number displayed in the third effect. It is possible to execute the fourth effect in which a larger number of button images BN1 and BN2 are displayed than the number of button images BN1 to be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), after the fourth effect, an enlarged button image BBN that represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and is larger than the button image BN is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), after the fourth effect, a sword image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. , The third effect is executed after the second effect, the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, and the fourth effect is executed after the third effect, the player. The number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by, and after the fourth effect, the total points which are the total of the number of points displayed in the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. A few TPDs are displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the meter image PL is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. After the total number of points TPD is displayed, the meter image PL changes according to the total number of points TPD. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the operation means image display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D, the button image BN is assumed to represent the appearance of the effect button 63. However, the button image BN may represent the appearance of the sword button 65.
[Modification 2]
The above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D are assumed to be performed when the gaming state changes. However, the above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D may be performed in a gaming state other than the time of probability change. For example, the above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D may be performed during a normal time or a non-probability change time reduction.
[Modification 3]
The above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D are assumed to be executed when the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is repeated. However, the operation means image display effects A to D may be configured to proceed without pressing the effect button 63. Further, even if the sword member 64 is not pushed in, the total point increase display effect may be performed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
The first operating means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operating means image showing the appearance of the first operating means.
A first effect in which a plurality of images of the first operating means are displayed on the display means, and
A second effect in which a smaller number of the first operation means images than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the first effect is displayed, and a second effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a third effect in which a number of the first operation means images displayed is smaller than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-1.
The number of the first operating means images is less than the number of the first operating means images displayed in the second effect and larger than the number of the first operating means images displayed in the third effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the displayed fourth effect can be executed.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is an enlarged first operation means image that represents the appearance of the first operation means and is larger than the first operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized in that the enlarged first operation means image is displayed after the fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-2 is further described.
It is equipped with a second operating means that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operating means image showing the appearance of the second operating means.
A gaming machine characterized in that an image of the second operating means is displayed after the fourth effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-2 to E1-4.
The second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player.
The third effect is executed after the second effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player.
The fourth effect is executed after the third effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player.
After the fourth effect, the total number of points, which is the total of the second effect, the third effect, and the number of points displayed in the fourth effect, is displayed. Game machine.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E1-5.
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image.
The meter image is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that after the total number of points is displayed, the meter image changes according to the total number of points.

The effect during probabilistic change will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. This probabilistic effect can be executed when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect during probability variation, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.
When the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is in the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is continued until the next big hit, so that the next big hit is easier than in the normal state.

[Probability change production A]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the probabilistic change effect A.
In the probabilistic change effect A, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but are performed with different variations.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the targeting mission effect A is performed. In this targeting mission effect A, the target image E21 is displayed. This target image E21 represents a circular target, half of the target area is a region (probability suggestion region) suggesting a probability variation jackpot (V-passing planned jackpot), and the other half region of the target is a normal jackpot (normal jackpot). It is a region (also called a normal suggestion region) that suggests a V non-passing jackpot. In the targeting mission production, the target image E21 rotates around and hits an arrow as a mission.

After the targeting mission effect A, the following targeting success effect A and targeting loss effect A can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), the hit success effect A is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), the target loss effect A is executed.

In the target hit success effect A, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), an arrow is pierced into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E21, and an effect suggesting that the target is a probability change jackpot is performed. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target loss effect A, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), an effect in which an arrow is pierced into the normal suggestion area of the target image E21 is performed, and an effect suggesting that the target image is a big hit is performed. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then the time is shortened (low accuracy and high base state).

In addition, after the target hit mission production A, the arrow always hits, and either the target hit success production A or the target loss production A is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), the targeting mission effect B is performed. In this targeting mission effect B, the target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target region is a region suggesting a probability variation jackpot (probability variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggestion region). Also called). In the targeting mission production, the target image E21 rotates around and hits an arrow as a mission.

After the targeting mission effect B, the following targeting success effect B and targeting loss effect B can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit success effect B is executed. In the case of loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), the target loss effect B is executed.

In the target hit success effect B, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), an arrow is pierced into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, which suggests that the target image is a probability change jackpot. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target loss effect B, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), an arrow is pierced into the loss area of the target image E22, and an effect suggesting that the target image is a loss rather than a big hit is performed. After this production, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started again.

In addition, after the targeting mission production B, the arrow always hits, and either the targeting success production B or the targeting loss production BNP is performed. That is, at the time when this second reach effect is selected, if a big hit is made, it is determined that the probability variable big hit will always occur. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probabilistic jackpot or a loss.

[Probability change production B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the probabilistic change effect B.
In the probabilistic change effect B, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but are performed with different variations.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), a battle effect is performed. In this battle production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (engage) with each other.

After the battle production, the following battle victory production and battle defeat production can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB, and the victory suggestion image E23 and the probability change suggestion image E24 are displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a probability variation jackpot. Further, the probability change suggestion image E24 is an image suggesting a probability change jackpot. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, and the defeat suggestion image E25 and the normal suggestion image E26 are displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). Further, the normal suggestion image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then the time is shortened (low accuracy and high base state).

In addition, after the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), the target mission production is performed. In this targeting mission production, the target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target region is a region suggesting a probability variation jackpot (probability variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggestion region). Also called). In the targeting mission production, the target image E21 rotates around and hits an arrow as a mission.

After the targeting mission production, the following targeting success production and targeting loss production can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), a successful hit effect is executed. In the case of loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), the target loss effect is executed.

In the target hit success effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), an arrow is pierced into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, which suggests that the target image is a probability change jackpot. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), an arrow is pierced into the loss area of the target image E22, and an effect suggesting that it is a loss rather than a big hit is performed. After this production, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started again.

In addition, after the targeting mission production, the arrow always hits, and either the targeting success production or the targeting loss production is performed. That is, at the time when this second reach effect is selected, if a big hit is made, it is determined that the probability variable big hit will always occur. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probabilistic jackpot or a loss.

[Probability change production C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the probabilistic change effect C.
In the probabilistic change effect C, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but are performed with different variations.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), the battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle production 1, a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB battle (engage) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB confront each other, and the meter image E27 is displayed. This meter image E27 represents the hit point (life point) of the enemy character CRB, and the decrease in this meter value indicates that it is more advantageous to the ally character CRA. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. As a matter of course, when the damage is large, the decrease range of the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the ally character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the ally character CRA loses.

After the battle effect 2, the following battle victory effect and battle defeat effect can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB, and the victory suggestion image E23 and the probability change suggestion image E24 are performed. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a probability variation jackpot. Further, the probability change suggestion image E24 is an image suggesting a probability change jackpot. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, and the defeat suggestion image E25 is usually suggested. Image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). Further, the normal suggestion image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then the time is shortened (low accuracy and high base state).

In addition, after the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), the target mission production is performed. In this targeting mission production, the target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target region is a region suggesting a probability variation jackpot (probability variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggestion region). Also called). In the targeting mission production, the target image E21 rotates around and hits an arrow as a mission.

After the targeting mission production, the following targeting success production and targeting loss production can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), a successful hit effect is executed. In the case of loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), the target loss effect is executed.

In the target hit success effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), an arrow is pierced into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, which suggests that the target image is a probability change jackpot. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), an arrow is pierced into the loss area of the target image E22, and an effect suggesting that the target image is a loss rather than a big hit is performed. After this production, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started again.

In addition, after the targeting mission production, the arrow always hits, and either the targeting success production or the targeting loss production is performed. That is, at the time when this second reach effect is selected, if a big hit is made, it is determined that the probability variable big hit will always occur. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probabilistic jackpot or a loss.

[Probability change production D]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the probabilistic change effect D.
In the probabilistic change effect D, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same variation, but are performed with different variations.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), the battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle production 1, a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB battle (engage) is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), the battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and the meter image E27 and the ally participation icon E28 are displayed. This meter image E27 represents the hit point (life point) of the enemy character CRB, and the decrease in this meter value indicates that it is more advantageous to the ally character CRA. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. As a matter of course, when the damage is large, the decrease range of the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the ally character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the ally character CRA loses.

Further, the ally participation icon E28 is an icon suggesting that a predetermined ally character participates in the battle production. A character is displayed on the ally participation icon E28, and the character participates in the battle. In addition, one of the plurality of characters is displayed on the ally participation icon E28. These characters are provided with an order of strength. If there is an ally participation icon E28 corresponding to a character having a high rank of strength, it becomes easy to lower the meter value of the meter image E27 when the character participates in the war. Further, as the number of ally participation icons E28 increases, the number of characters participating in the battle increases, so that the chance of attack increases and it becomes easier to lower the meter value of the meter image E27. That is, the larger the number of icons of the ally participation icon E28 and the higher the order of the strength of the characters corresponding to the ally participation icon E28, the easier it is to lower the meter value of the meter image E27, and the easier it is to defeat the enemy character CRB. .. As a result, it becomes easy to become a probabilistic jackpot.

After the battle effect 2, the following battle victory effect and battle defeat effect can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), a battle defeat effect is executed.

In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins the enemy character CRB, and the victory suggestion image E23 and the probability change suggestion image E24 are performed. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a probability variation jackpot. Further, the probability change suggestion image E24 is an image suggesting a probability change jackpot. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the battle defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB, and the defeat suggestion image E25 is usually suggested. Image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image suggesting that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). Further, the normal suggestion image E26 is an image suggesting a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then the time is shortened (low accuracy and high base state).

In addition, after the battle production, the battle is always settled, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the probabilistic change effect, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), the target mission production is performed. In this targeting mission production, the target image E21 is displayed. This target image E22 represents a circular target, half of the target region is a region suggesting a probability variation jackpot (probability variation suggestion region), and the other half region of the target is a region suggesting a loss (loss suggestion region). Also called). In the targeting mission production, the target image E21 rotates around and hits an arrow as a mission.

After the targeting mission production, the following targeting success production and targeting loss production can be executed. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: fluctuation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), a successful hit effect is executed. In the case of loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of fluctuation patterns P65-67, 69-71 (reach of SP4)), the target loss effect is executed.

In the target hit success effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), an arrow is pierced into the probability change suggestion area of the target image E22, which suggests that the target is a probability change jackpot. After this production, a big hit game is performed, and then it becomes a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

On the other hand, in the target loss effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), an arrow is pierced into the loss area of the target image E22, and an effect suggesting that the target image is a loss rather than a big hit is performed. After this production, the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started again.

In addition, after the targeting mission production, the arrow always hits, and either the targeting success production or the targeting loss production is performed. That is, at the time when this second reach effect is selected, if a big hit is made, it is determined that the probability variable big hit will always occur. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probabilistic jackpot or a loss.

In the probabilistic change effects A to D, the first reach effect corresponds to the first display effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to the second display effect. Further, in the above-mentioned probabilistic effects B to D, the first reach effect corresponds to the battle-type reach effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to the non-battle-type reach effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the effect during the probabilistic change is shown below.
[Effect 1]
When the first reach effect is performed in the probabilistic effect A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot is confirmed, the target mission effect A or the battle effect is performed, and the target success effect A or the battle is performed. If the game shifts to the victory effect, the probability variation jackpot (the jackpot scheduled to pass V) is confirmed, and after the jackpot game, the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state) that is relatively advantageous to the player is entered. If you perform target mission production A or battle production and shift to target loss production or battle defeat production, the normal jackpot (V non-passing planned jackpot) will be confirmed and the time saving state (low accuracy high) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game Move to the base state). On the other hand, when the second reach production is performed, the jackpot is not fixed, but if the target hit mission production B or the target hit mission production is performed and the target hit success production B or the target hit success production is performed, the probability changes. The jackpot (the jackpot scheduled to pass V) is confirmed, and after the jackpot game, the player shifts to a probabilistic state (high accuracy and high base state) that is relatively advantageous to the player. If you perform targeting mission production B or targeting mission production and shift to targeting loss production B or targeting loss production, the normal jackpot (V non-passing scheduled jackpot) will be confirmed and the time saving state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game ( Shift to low accuracy and high base state).
That is, when the first reach effect is performed, the jackpot is fixed, and it becomes either a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the second reach production is performed, the jackpot is not fixed, but in the case of the jackpot, it is a probabilistic jackpot.
During the probability change (during the high accuracy and high base state), when performing the reach effect, one of the first reach effect and the second reach effect is selected.
According to this configuration, in the case of the first reach effect, if the target hit mission effect or the battle effect does not shift to the target hit success effect or the battle victory effect, the jackpot is usually fixed, so that the game In the case of the first reach production, the person will pay considerable attention to watch the transition of the first reach production. On the other hand, in the case of the second reach effect, even if the target hit mission effect B or the target hit mission effect does not shift to the target hit success effect B or the target hit success effect, the normal jackpot can be avoided. Therefore, the player can gracefully watch the transition of the first reach production with the feeling that the second reach production is "profitable if the target hit success production B or the target hit success production is shifted". In this way, there is a big difference in the player's feelings between the first reach production and the second reach production, and when the reach production is performed during the probability change, the first reach production and the second reach production Since one of the effects is selected, it is possible to provide a sharp game effect during the probability change. As a result, the player can enjoy the sharp production during the probable change, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the probabilistic effects B to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first reach effect, a battle effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA battle, and the second reach effect is a battle-type reach. When a different target mission production is performed and the first reach production is performed, the jackpot is confirmed, and if the ally character CRA wins, it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, and after the jackpot game, it becomes a probabilistic state that is relatively advantageous for the player. If the ally character CRA loses, it usually becomes a big hit, and after the big hit game, it shifts to a time saving state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. According to this configuration, if the ally character CRA wins in the battle production, it will be a probable change jackpot, and if the ally character CRA loses, it will be a normal jackpot, so the support target can be narrowed down to the ally character CRA, and the battle production can be enjoyed in an easy-to-understand manner. Can be done. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the probabilistic change effects C to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image E27 is displayed in the battle effect 2 of the first reach effect, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle a predetermined number of times, and the ally. When the character CRA damages the enemy character CRB, the meter value of the meter image E27 is reduced, and when the meter value becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins, the battle victory effect is performed, and the probability changes. After the big hit, it shifts to the probabilistic state. According to this configuration, by using the meter image E27, it is possible to convey to the player the transition of victory or defeat in the battle production in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can be happy and disappointed in the battle production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the probabilistic change productions A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second reach production, the targeting mission effect indicating whether or not the targeting mission is successful is executed, and the targeting mission is successful. The jackpot is confirmed, and after the jackpot game, it shifts to the probability change state. According to this configuration, if the targeting mission is successful, the probability variation jackpot will be confirmed, and even if the targeting mission is not successful, it will not be a normal jackpot, so the best production while immersing the targeting mission in a sense of superiority. You can see it gracefully. In addition, by making it a mission-type production, it is possible to easily convey to the player whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a loss. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the probabilistic effect D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the participation of a predetermined character in the battle is displayed, and the larger the number of the participation, the higher the probability that the ally character wins. According to this configuration, the more a predetermined character participates in the battle, the more enthusiastic the player becomes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the battle production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the probabilistic effect A to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game state is changed to the probabilistic state in the probabilistic effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to excite the production during the probability change in which the production tends to be monotonous because the next big hit is easy. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect during probabilistic change.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the probabilistic state, only the probabilistic change effect (first reach effect and second reach effect) may be performed.

[Modification 2]
The probabilistic effect (first reach effect and second reach effect) of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment is not only in the probabilistic state (during probabilistic change), but also in the normal state (low probability low base state) and the time saving state (low). It may be performed in the high accuracy base state) and the high accuracy low base state (latent probability change state). Further, the first reach effect or the second reach effect of the probabilistic change effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment may be performed in a predetermined mode. This predetermined mode may be provided, for example, from after the jackpot game to a predetermined number of fluctuations. Further, the predetermined mode may be provided from the fluctuation after the fluctuation in which the super reach effect is deviated to the predetermined number of fluctuations. Further, the predetermined mode may be provided as a look-ahead effect.

[Modification 3]
In the probabilistic change effects B to D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA are in a battle, but the characters of friends may also battle.

[Modification example 4]
In the probabilistic effect D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the ally participation icon E28 is displayed, and when the ally character corresponding to the ally participation icon E28 participates in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 tends to decrease. However, when the enemy participation icon is displayed and the enemy character corresponding to the enemy participation icon is weak, the attack chance of the ally character may increase in the battle so that the meter value of the meter image E27 can be easily lowered.

[Modification 5]
In the probabilistic effect C and D of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image E27 corresponds to the HP of the enemy character, but it may correspond to the HP of the ally character. In this case, if the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, the ally character wins, and if the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character loses. Further, the meter image E27 suggests that if the meter value decreases, it is advantageous for the battle, but the meter image E27 may correspond to the attack energy that increases each time the ally character attacks. In this case, the higher the meter value of the meter image E27, the higher the winning probability of the ally character.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E2-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and if the first condition is satisfied, the player shifts to the first gaming state, which is relatively advantageous for the player, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot. If the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the player shifts to the second gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player.
When the second display effect is performed, the jackpot is not determined, but in the case of a jackpot, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the game shifts to the first gaming state.
When the reach effect is performed in the predetermined game mode, one of the first display effect and the second display effect is selected.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1.
The first display effect is a battle-type reach effect in which the first character and the second character battle.
The second display effect is a non-battle type reach effect different from the battle type reach.
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is confirmed, and if the first character wins, the game shifts to the first gaming state, which is relatively advantageous for the player, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot. If the first character is defeated, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the player shifts to the second gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2.
In the battle-type reach effect, a meter is displayed, the meter value represented by the meter is reduced in the battle a predetermined number of times, and if the meter value is reduced to a predetermined value, the first character wins and the first gaming state. To move to
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3.
In the non-battle-type reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined mission is successful is executed, and if the predetermined mission is successful, a jackpot is determined, and after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, the first Shift to the game state of 1,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-4.
In the battle-type reach effect, the participation of a predetermined character in the battle is displayed, and the larger the number of participations, the higher the probability that the first character will win.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-5.
The predetermined game mode is a mode indicating that the game state is a probabilistic state.
A game machine characterized by that.

The battle effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. This battle effect is during the variable display of the decorative symbol that synchronizes with the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"), and in particular, the game state is in a high probability state and the time is shortened. Can be executed during state, electric chew support (electric support), etc.

[Battle production A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 144 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the characters “probability changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 144 (A), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character on the player side are in the center of the display screen 7a. An image of a battle with the CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped becomes a probabilistic jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 144 (C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" suggesting that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. Has been done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" as a probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ, in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped, is displayed. In addition, this "777" is displayed so as to be different in size, the left "7" on the ally character CRA side is the largest, the middle "7" is the next largest, and the side opposite to the ally character CRA. The "7" on the right is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ in this way, it is possible to impress the player with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), the battle defeat jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle defeat jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA is defeated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 144 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the character "V" suggesting that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been done. Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped, is displayed. The "888" is displayed in different sizes, with the right "8" on the enemy character CRB side being the largest, followed by the middle "8" being the largest on the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. The "8" on the left is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), the probability variation jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probabilistic jackpot suggestion effect, the characters "Victory!", Which indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, are displayed in large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "victory!", It is possible to make the player think that the probabilistic jackpot symbol arrangement "777" will be a probabilistic jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variation jackpot confirmation effect, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 144 (A) is obtained as the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ as a result of the battle effect of FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E). It stopped at "777" in the above, indicating that it was a big hit. In addition, the characters "Probability change jackpot ~!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the probabilistic jackpot.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 144 (E), as shown in FIG. 144 (G), a normal jackpot suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, the characters "defeated!" Indicates that the ally character CRA has been eliminated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and the characters "defeated!" Are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "defeated!", It is possible to make the player think that the normal jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ "888" is a normal jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), the normal jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot confirmation effect, the fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 144 (A) are obtained as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ as a result of the battle effect of FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E). It stopped at "888" and indicates that it was a normal big hit. In addition, the characters "normal jackpot ~!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this normal jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the normal jackpot.

That is, in the battle effect A shown in FIG. 144, the symbol arrangement at the time of victory and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat are displayed in advance during the battle effect. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during probabilistic change), and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array is displayed in advance as the symbol array when winning, and the symbol array when defeated is usually the jackpot symbol array. A notice is displayed. That is, when shifting to the battle production, the jackpot is confirmed, and whether the confirmed jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probabilistic state will continue during the battle production or whether the probable change state will fall to the normal state.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B.
In the battle effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 145 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 145 (A), the characters “probability changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 145 (A), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character on the player side are in the center of the display screen 7a. An image of a battle with the CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped becomes a probabilistic jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 145 (C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" suggesting that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. Has been done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" is displayed as the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ1 in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped. In addition, this "777" is displayed so as to be different in size, the left "7" on the ally character CRA side is the largest, the middle "7" is the next largest, and the side opposite to the ally character CRA. The "7" on the right is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ1 in this way, it is possible to impress the player with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), the battle defeat jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle defeat jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA is defeated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 145 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the character "V" suggesting that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been done. Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped, is displayed. The "888" is displayed in different sizes, with the right "8" on the enemy character CRB side being the largest, followed by the middle "8" being the largest on the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. The "8" on the left is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), the probability variation jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probabilistic jackpot suggestion effect, the characters "Victory!", Which indicates that the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, are displayed in large size in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "victory!", It is possible to make the player think that the probability variation jackpot is "777" in the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), the probability variation 16R (round) jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variation 16R jackpot confirmation effect, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 145 (A) is the result of the battle effect of FIGS. 145 (B) to 145 (E), and the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 It stopped at "777" as, and it shows that it was a probable big hit in 16 rounds. In addition, the characters "Probability variation 16R jackpot ~!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this probability variation 16R jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the probability variation jackpot of 16 rounds.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 145 (C), as shown in FIG. 145 (G), the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRC wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRC wins, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped becomes a probabilistic jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 145 (G), the ally character CRC is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" suggesting that the ally character CRC has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRC. Has been done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "555" as the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ2, in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped, is displayed. In addition, this "555" is displayed so as to be different in size, the left "5" on the ally character CRC side is the largest, the middle "5" is the next largest, and the side opposite to the ally character CRC. The "5" on the right is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ2 in this way, it is possible to impress the player with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ2.
That is, the difference between the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect shown in FIG. 145 (G) and the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect shown in FIG. 145 (C) is that the ally character CRC becomes the ally character CRC. That is, "777" as the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ1 becomes "555" as the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E) described above, the probability variation jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a, and as a result of the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRB, it is shown that the ally character CRC has won. The characters "Victory!" Are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "victory!", It is possible to make the player think that the probabilistic jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot with "555" of the symbol array AOZ2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), the probability variation 15R (round) jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability variation 15R jackpot confirmation effect, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 145 (A) is the result of the battle effect of FIGS. 145 (B) to 145 (E), and the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2 It stopped at "555" as, indicating that it was a probable big hit in 15 rounds. In addition, the characters "Probability variation 15R jackpot ~!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this probability variation 15R jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the probability variation jackpot of 15 rounds.

That is, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, the symbol arrangement at the time of winning and the symbol arrangement at the time of losing are displayed in advance during the battle effect. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during probabilistic change), and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array is displayed in advance as the symbol array when winning, and the symbol array when defeated is usually the jackpot symbol array. A notice is displayed. That is, when shifting to the battle production, the jackpot is confirmed, and whether the confirmed jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probabilistic state will continue during the battle production or whether the probable change state will fall to the normal state.
Further, in the battle effect B, there are a plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbols, and different numbers of probability variation jackpots are set for each of the plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbol arrays. Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of ally characters, and each of the plurality of types of ally characters is associated with one of a plurality of types of probabilistic jackpot symbol arrays that are displayed in advance when a player wins a battle effect. That is, the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1 displayed in advance when the ally character CRA shown in FIG. 145 (C) wins is the probability variation jackpot symbol array "777" of 16 rounds, and the ally character CRC shown in FIG. 145 (G). The probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2, which is displayed in advance when the player wins, is the probability variation jackpot symbol array "555" for 15 rounds.
That is, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of ally characters on the player side who battle in the battle effect, and the player wins the battle depending on which ally character appears in the battle effect. You can see the number of rounds of the probability change jackpot. In other words, depending on which ally character appears in the battle production, the player can estimate the number of balls to be played in the jackpot game when the battle is won.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 146 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the characters “probability changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 146 (A), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character on the player side are in the center of the display screen 7a. An image of a battle with the CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped becomes a probabilistic jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" suggesting that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. Has been done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" as a probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ, in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped, is displayed. In addition, this "777" is displayed so as to be different in size, the left "7" on the ally character CRA side is the largest, the middle "7" is the next largest, and the side opposite to the ally character CRA. The "7" on the right is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ in this way, it is possible to impress the player with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), the battle defeat jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle defeat jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA is defeated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the character "V" indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been done. Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 that is scheduled to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. The "888" is displayed in different sizes, with the right "8" on the enemy character CRB side being the largest, followed by the middle "8" being the largest on the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. The "8" on the left is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 in this way, it is possible to impress the player with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, by displaying the friendly character CRA and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ1 and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), a normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, the characters "defeated!" Indicates that the ally character CRA has been eliminated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and the characters "defeated!" Are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "defeated!", The player can be made to think that the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 "888" is a normal jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), the promotion failure normal jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this promotion failure normal jackpot confirmation effect, the screen of the characters "defeated!" Shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the promotion effect SKG is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. In this promotion effect SKG, in the display area surrounded by a square frame, a plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays including a normal jackpot symbol array (for example, even-numbered doublets) and a probability variation jackpot symbol array (for example, odd-numbered doublets) are arranged. While scrolling in the vertical direction, a button effect is performed that causes the player to repeatedly hit the button. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed in a manner that extends beyond the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the characters "button repeated hits!" Are displayed below this button image BOG. ing. As a result, the player can be impressed with the promotion effect SKG and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the button (or after a predetermined time elapses when the player does not repeatedly hit the button), the scrolling multiple types of jackpot symbol arrangements stop, and the normal jackpot symbol arrangement or the probability variation jackpot is stopped. Either of the symbol arrays is displayed. In the promotion failure normal jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 146 (F), it is shown that "888" (normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1) has stopped as the normal jackpot symbol array, thereby promoting from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot. Is suggested to have failed. As a result, "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is continuously displayed as it is without changing to the probabilistic jackpot symbol array, and the normal jackpot symbol array "888" is displayed. At the top, the words "Promotion failure normal jackpot!" Are newly displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot has failed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 146 (D), as shown in FIG. 146 (G), the battle defeat jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. This battle defeat jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRC is defeated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRD. It is a production. When the ally character CRC is eliminated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (G), the enemy character CRD is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the character "V" suggesting that the enemy character CRD has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRD. Has been done. Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "666" as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2, which is scheduled to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, is displayed. In addition, this "666" is displayed so as to be different in size, the right "6" on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, then the middle "6" is the largest, and on the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. The "6" on the left is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2. Furthermore, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRD and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2. Can be done.
That is, the difference between the battle defeat jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect shown in FIG. 146 (G) and the battle defeat jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect shown in FIG. 146 (C) is that the enemy character CRB becomes the enemy character CRD. That is, "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 becomes "666" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), the promotion success probability change jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this promotion success probability change jackpot confirmation effect, the screen of the characters "defeated!" Shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and "666" as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a ( (Not shown), and the promotion effect SKG is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. In this promotion effect SKG, in the display area surrounded by a square frame, a plurality of types of jackpot symbol arrays including a normal jackpot symbol array (for example, even-numbered doublets) and a probability variation jackpot symbol array (for example, odd-numbered doublets) are arranged. While scrolling in the vertical direction, a button effect is performed that causes the player to repeatedly hit the button. In this button effect, the button image BOG is displayed in a manner that extends beyond the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the characters "button repeated hits!" Are displayed below this button image BOG. ing. As a result, the player can be impressed with the promotion effect SKG and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the button (or after a predetermined time elapses when the player does not repeatedly hit the button), the scrolling multiple types of jackpot symbol arrangements stop, and the normal jackpot symbol arrangement or the probability variation jackpot is stopped. Either of the symbol arrays is displayed. In the promotion success probability change jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 146 (H), it is shown that "777" has stopped as the probability variation jackpot symbol array, which suggests that the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probability variation jackpot was successful. To. As a result, "666" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is changed to the probabilistic jackpot symbol array "777", and is "promoted" above the probabilistic jackpot symbol array "777". The words "Success Probability Change Jackpot!" Are newly displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the player has been promoted from a normal jackpot to a probabilistic jackpot.

That is, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, the symbol arrangement when winning and the symbol arrangement when losing are displayed in advance during the battle effect. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during probabilistic change), and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array is displayed in advance as the symbol array when winning, and the symbol array when defeated is usually the jackpot symbol array. A notice is displayed. That is, when shifting to the battle production, the jackpot is confirmed, and whether the confirmed jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probabilistic state will continue during the battle production or whether the probable change state will fall to the normal state.
Further, in the battle effect C, there are a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrays, and the normal jackpots having different promotion rates (promotion rate from normal jackpot to probabilistic jackpot) are set for each of the plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrays. .. Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters, and each of the plurality of types of enemy characters is associated with one of a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrays that are displayed in advance when a player wins a battle effect. That is, the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed in advance when the enemy character CRB shown in FIG. 146 (D) wins is the normal jackpot symbol array "888", and the enemy character CRD shown in FIG. 146 (G) wins. The normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2, which is sometimes displayed as a notice, is the normal jackpot symbol array "666". The promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot is set higher for "666" than for "888".
That is, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters that battle in the battle effect, and the player determines which enemy character appears in the battle effect when the enemy character wins the battle. The promotion rate from normal jackpot to probabilistic jackpot can be estimated. In other words, depending on which enemy character appears in the battle production, the player can estimate the degree of expectation that the ally character will be a probabilistic jackpot even when the ally character loses the battle.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. The order of stopping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, then the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, in FIG. 147 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the characters “probability changing” are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect does not display the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and develops from the decorative pattern variation effect shown in FIG. 147 (A). In the center of the display screen 7a, the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character An image of a battle with the CRB is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle victory jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped becomes a probabilistic jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the probability change state continues. As shown in FIG. 147 (C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" suggesting that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. Has been done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" as a probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ, in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped, is displayed. In addition, this "777" is displayed so as to be different in size, the left "7" on the ally character CRA side is the largest, the middle "7" is the next largest, and the side opposite to the ally character CRA. The "7" on the right is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ in this way, it is possible to impress the player with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), the battle defeat jackpot symbol arrangement notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle defeat jackpot symbol array notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to stop when the ally character CRA is defeated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. It is a production. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol array scheduled to be stopped is usually a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is defeated, it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 147 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the character "V" suggesting that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. Has been done. Further, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" as a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ, in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are scheduled to be stopped, is displayed. The "888" is displayed in different sizes, with the right "8" on the enemy character CRB side being the largest, followed by the middle "8" being the largest on the opposite side of the enemy character CRB. The "8" on the left is displayed in the smallest size. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this way, the player can be impressed with the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, by displaying the ally character CRA and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ and the enemy character CRB and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ symmetrically, the player is impressed with the probabilistic jackpot symbol array AOZ and the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Can be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), a normal jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, the characters "defeated!" Indicates that the ally character CRA has been eliminated as a result of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and the characters "defeated!" Are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the characters "defeated!", It is possible to make the player think that the normal jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ "888" is a normal jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), a normal jackpot confirmation fake effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot confirmed fake effect, the fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 147 (A) are normal on the display screen 7a as a result of the battle effect of FIGS. 147 (B) to 147 (E). It is a production that makes the player think that "888" as the jackpot symbol array BOZ has stopped, as if it was a normal jackpot. However, in the normal jackpot confirmed fake effect shown in FIG. 147 (F), "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ is not completely stopped, and is in a state of slightly swinging up and down (2 or 3 frames). It has become. In addition, the characters "normal jackpot ~!" Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In other words, due to this normal jackpot confirmation fake effect, the player has the illusion that the normal jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), the battle revival probability change jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Although detailed illustration of this battle revival probability change jackpot suggestion effect is omitted, the screen of "888" of the displayed normal jackpot symbol array BOZ is switched in the normal jackpot confirmation fake effect shown in FIG. 147 (F). The battle effect shown in FIG. 147 (B) is executed, in which the once defeated ally character CRA is revived and the enemy character CRB is battled again. Then, in this re-performed battle production, the ally character CRA wins this time, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), the ally character CRA wins in the center of the display screen 7a. The words "Resurrection victory!" Are displayed in large size. By displaying the characters "Resurrection Victory!", It is possible to make the player think that the probability variation jackpot is "777" of the probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this probability change jackpot confirmation effect, the screen of "Resurrection victory!" Displayed in the battle resurrection probability change jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 147 (G) is switched, and "777" as the probability change jackpot symbol array AOZ is displayed. It is displayed on 7a, indicating that it was a probable change jackpot. In addition, the characters "Probability change jackpot ~!" Are displayed above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this probabilistic jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the probabilistic jackpot.

That is, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, during the battle effect, the symbol arrangement at the time of victory and the symbol arrangement at the time of defeat are displayed in advance. The game state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during probabilistic change), and the probabilistic jackpot symbol array is displayed in advance as the symbol array when winning, and the symbol array when defeated is usually the jackpot symbol array. A notice is displayed. That is, when shifting to the battle production, the jackpot is confirmed, and whether the confirmed jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot is displayed in advance during the battle production. In other words, a notice is displayed as to whether the probabilistic state will continue during the battle production or whether the probable change state will fall to the normal state.
Furthermore, in the battle production D, the ally character on the player side is once defeated in the battle production, and after making the player think that it will be a normal jackpot and fall from the probable state to the normal state, the ally character will be revived and again. A battle production is performed, and this time, a revival production in which the ally character wins is performed. As a result, it is possible to make the player who thinks that the normal jackpot will fall from the probabilistic state to the normal state, and that the probabilistic jackpot will continue. That is, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, after the normal jackpot symbol arrangement displayed in advance is once indicated by a fake, the effect of determining the probabilistic jackpot symbol arrangement displayed in advance is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the battle effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, it is possible to execute a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character on the player side compete against each other, and the battle effect is performed in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol. During the battle effect, the stop symbol array in the predetermined change of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins and the stop symbol array in the predetermined change of the decorative symbol when the ally character loses are displayed in advance. ing. According to this configuration, the player can estimate the privilege given to the player when the ally character wins and the penalty given to the player when the ally character loses. Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbols when the ally character wins is configured to be a probability variation jackpot symbol array. According to this configuration, the player knows that when the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and after the big hit, the game state shifts to the high probability state or the high probability state continues. You will know what to do. As a result, the player can face the game with great expectations, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the probability variation jackpot symbol array has a configuration in which the number of jackpot rounds differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the number of rounds of the probabilistic jackpot when the ally character wins the battle. That is, the player will be able to estimate the number of balls to be played in the jackpot game when the ally character wins the battle. As a result, the player can face the game with great expectation when the probability variation jackpot symbol array with a large number of rounds (the number of balls is large) is displayed in advance in the battle production, and as a result, the interest of the game Can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbols when the ally character is defeated is usually a jackpot symbol array. According to this configuration, the player knows that when the ally character is defeated, it becomes a big hit, and after the big hit, the game state is maintained in the normal state or the time saving state, or from the probability change state to the normal state. You will be able to understand that it will shift to a shorter time state. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the development of the destination of the game, and can perform an appropriate game for the development of the destination of the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the normal jackpot symbol arrangement has a configuration in which the promotion rate to the probability variation jackpot differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot when the ally character loses the battle. That is, even when a teammate character loses the battle, the player can estimate the degree of expectation that the character will be promoted from the normal jackpot to become a probabilistic jackpot. As a result, the player can enter the game with great expectation when the normal jackpot symbol array with a high promotion rate to the probabilistic jackpot is displayed in advance, even when the ally character is eliminated in the battle. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the battle effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the image display device 7 is configured by one display screen 7a, and the symbol when the ally character wins on the one display screen 7a. The arrangement and the design arrangement at the time of defeat are displayed in advance on a plane, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and the symbol arrangement for displaying these notices is displayed on the first display screen. It may be. In this way, the symbol arrangement to be displayed in advance is displayed closer to the player, and it is possible to strongly appeal to the player in an extremely impactful manner. An image display device having a first display screen and a second display screen may be configured to be capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D). By doing so, it is possible to further appeal to the player by displaying the display of the symbol arrangement to be announced in 3D.

[Modification 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, during the battle production, the probability variation jackpot symbol array when the ally character wins and the normal jackpot symbol array when the ally character loses are displayed in advance. However, the display timing of these foretold symbol arrays is not particularly limited. For example, after displaying the probability variation jackpot symbol array (normal jackpot symbol array), the normal jackpot symbol array (probability variation jackpot symbol array) may be continuously displayed, or may be displayed after a lapse of a predetermined period. Good.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, when the game state is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change), a battle effect is performed, and when the ally character wins and loses. Although the design arrangement of the above is displayed in advance, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a battle effect may be performed in a time-saving state or a normal state in which the game state is a low probability state, and a symbol arrangement when the ally character wins and a symbol arrangement when the ally character loses may be displayed in advance. In this case, the symbol array when the ally character wins may be the jackpot symbol array (including the probability variation jackpot symbol array and the normal jackpot symbol array), and the symbol array when the ally character loses may be the lost symbol array. Alternatively, the symbol array when the ally character wins is a probabilistic jackpot symbol array, and the symbol array when defeated is a normal jackpot symbol array with no time reduction and a small number of balls (for example, 2 round jackpot). Alternatively, it may be one with no number of balls (for example, in two rounds, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and it is practically impossible to win).

[Modification example 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbol arrays when a ally character wins, and the plurality of types of probability variation jackpot symbol arrays have different numbers of probability variation jackpots. However, this is because there are multiple types of normal jackpot symbol arrays when a friendly character is defeated, and these multiple types of normal jackpot symbol arrays have different numbers of normal jackpots. It may be set. In this way, the player can know the number of rounds of the normal jackpot when he loses the battle, and can estimate the number of balls to be played in the jackpot game when he loses the battle.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, a V attacker having a V region in a predetermined round of a jackpot game, commonly known as a V-ST machine, is released, and the V attacker is released. By letting the V-attacker win a game ball and letting it pass through the V region, the game state after the big hit becomes a high probability state (probability change state) until the symbol changes a predetermined number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the battle effect may be performed by a game machine, commonly known as a loop machine, in which the game state becomes a high probability state (probability change state) after the big hit until the next big hit. In this way, if the ally character wins in the battle production and becomes a probabilistic jackpot with the previously announced probabilistic jackpot symbol arrangement, the high probability state (probability change state) will continue until the next jackpot, and as a result, Furthermore, the fun of the game can be improved. Alternatively, the battle production is commonly called a 1-type 2-type mixer, which is a type 1 jackpot with a time-saving jackpot, a type 1 jackpot with a time-saving jackpot, and a jackpot with a time-saving, which is a predetermined number of times after the jackpot. The time saving state (electric support state) continues until the symbol changes, and when it hits at the variable start port (special 2) in this time saving state, the 2 types of attackers with V region open, and the 2 types of attackers that have opened up It may be performed by a game machine, which is a two-kind jackpot, which is a jackpot with a short time by winning a game ball and passing it through the V region. In this case, in the battle production, in addition to being involved in the symbol variation that draws one type of jackpot, when the ally character wins, the jackpot symbol array with a short time is displayed in advance, and when the ally character loses, the jackpot symbol array without a time reduction is announced. It should be displayed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E3-1]
A display means that can execute multiple display effects,
A symbol display means that can display a variable display of a symbol,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
It is a game machine equipped with
The display means can execute a battle effect in which a player's ally character and an enemy character play against each other as one of the plurality of display effects.
The display means performs the battle effect in a predetermined variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display means, and during the battle effect, a stop symbol array in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins, A notice is displayed with the stop symbol arrangement in the predetermined change of the decorative symbol when the ally character is defeated.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E3-2]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins is a probability variation jackpot symbol array.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1.
[Aspect E3-3]
The number of jackpot rounds differs depending on the type of the probability variation jackpot symbol array.
The gaming machine according to the aspect E3-2.
[Aspect E3-4]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character is defeated is usually a jackpot symbol array.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3.
[Aspect E3-5]
The promotion rate to the probability variation jackpot differs depending on the type of the normal jackpot symbol array.
The gaming machine according to the aspect E3-4.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the effect button 63 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 64. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

In addition, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the game machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-mentioned display effect may be executed on the sub-display device.

The present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect can be modified or improved without departing from its purpose and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The pending image 14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 20 ... 1st starting port (1st ball entry port)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd entry port)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A game machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern.
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold digestion image.
When the decorative symbol is variably displayed, in the first area of the display means, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along the first direction along the variability direction of the decorative symbol, and the hold The first effect that the digestion image is not displayed and
In a second region where the position in the second direction intersecting the first direction is different from the first region, the plurality of holding icons are displayed side by side along the first direction. It is possible to produce and
In the first effect, among the plurality of hold icons, the first displayed hold icon is in the direction along the second direction and moves in the direction toward the second area. A gaming machine characterized in that the remaining hold icons that disappear from the display means and are displayed after the second one shift and move along the first direction .

Images